A kinetic universe ..

CO 0)

•g? Is

VI

O

5 M -

g t s I

•00 O

*N ^
»•? o

CO

I

o

cq

o

s 1

03

to

•§ •§

•*3 tj ^5

03

^

to

^
^

o

^

•&

o
o

•0,

^3

i

O

OJ

O

•c;

J5
| ^

"S

•5

OJ

exander

0)

S ^
'o* **

o -g

52^

03
»c»

03

"8

O

03

i2

13

03

S

.Q

03

OJ

-* JAN 13191

OF CALIFORNIA

A KINETIC UNIVERSE

EMBRACING

1. — Gravitation a Central Force : — weight increases
as the centre of the Earth is approached, all the way
to the centre.

2. — The Sun's Light and Heat is Mechanically de-
rived from a reciprocating movement of its constituent
Material and Magnetic Fields or Globes, of World-wide
or Orbal dimensions!, these movements constituting the
Sim an Electro-Magnetic Dynamo whose field and
armature reciprocate about each other in 1.1 second
of solar time.

3. — Movements of the Fluids of the Earth, under
gravitation of the Sun, Moon and Earth are the cause
of Precession and Nutation.

4. — The Atmospheric and Oceanic Circulation, in-
cluding the Tides, are of Precessional and Nutational
character, and due to Precessional and Nutational
forces.

5. — The Circulation of the Atmosphere and Ocean
is due directly to Gravitation of the Sun, Moon, and
Earth, and not to thermal convection as heretofore
supposed.

6. — The Oceanic Tides, semi-diurnal and diurnal, are
due to the eccentric positions of the fluids of the At-
mosphere and Ocean about the Earth, giving rise to
gravitational perturbations by the Sun and Moon.

7. — The Monsoon winds and Monsoon oceanic cur-
rents are due to the eccentric positions of the fluids
of the Atmosphere and Ocean, acted on by solar and
lunar gravitation; with special reference to such ac-
tion on the equatorial protuberance of the Atmosphere
and Ocean, and the eccentric position of the Indian
Ocean.

&c., &c., &c,

DUNDEE,
1903,

-3*7

.

>^

HE

'ERSITY

JOHN JONES, AGE 50.

Discoverer of the Magnetism of the Sun and the Electro-Magneto-Kinetic, or Mechanical Source of the
Sun's Light and Heat. Author of this Treatise, "A Kinetic Universe." Born at Benthall,
Broseley, Shropshire, February 5th, 1851.

ATMOSPHERIC CIRCULATION,

OCEANIC TIDES,

PRECESSION AND NUTATION,

JOHN JONES,

DUNDEE, A.D. 1901.

GRAVITATIONAL THEORY

OF THE

• ATMOSPHERIC CIRCULATION

BAROMETRIC AND WIND THEORY

OF THE

OCEAN TIDES AND CURRENTS,

And Subordination of the Precession of the Equinoxes
to the Movements of the Atmosphere,

More particularly, a direct action gravitational theory of
the circulation of the atmosphere, barometric pres-
sures and winds, assigning these to gravitation of the
Sun, Moon, and Earth, in contradistinction to the ther-
mal views now prevailing, which assign the winds to the
Sun's heat and thermal convection ; and a subordination
of the Oceanic Tides and Precession of the Equinoxes to
pressures and movements of the atmosphere acting on the
waters, and Earth's surface, in contradistinction to the
direct action gravitational theory now prevailing,

IB IT

JOHN JONES,

Author of " The Sun a Magnet," " New Selenography,"

." Coral Theory of the Lunar Structures,"
" The Sun a Dynamo," " Gravitation a Central Force/*

&c., &c., &c.

DEDICATED

Not to those persons who sit in the seats of learning, and
say "We are the men, and wisdom is dead without us,"
and who, closeted in their laboratories, deny tha prevail-
ing opinions, that the Moon can affect the weather, but to
the common paople, who believe the latter, and even the
so called vulgar, and to all with free unfettered minds,
from whom shall arise students at liberty to embrace the
newer truths. We cannot teach thosa who think that
they know, and are wedded to falsa systems, but there is
always hope of the rising generations. And as " Justifi-
tion by Faith" proclaimed by Luther reformed the re-
ligious world, so shall gravitation a central Jorce reform the
scientific world, and the atmospheric circulation due directly
to gravitation and tidal forces, vivify the science of meteoro-
logy, and evolve order out of chaos, in this department of

science.

i

590

UNIVERSITY

OF

ARGUMENT.

1. — The winds of the atmosphere have cosmical source.

2. — if the Earth were not influenced by external
bodies, the atmospheric circulation would cease to exist.

3. — The influencing body is either the sun or moon,
or both combined.

4. — The winds are not due to thermal convection
resulting from the sun's heat and polar cold, for in that
case they would at the base of the atmosphere, flow
from the poles to the tropics, which they do not, but in
the reverse direction.

5. — The winds are not due to thermal convection, re-
sulting from the sun's heat and polar cold, for in that
case the highest barometer would be in the polar regions,
and the lowest in the tropics. The reverse is very mar-
kedly the case, the barometer in the tropics averaging
over 30. 0 inches, and near the Arctic circles averaging
considerably less than 29. 3 inches. The maximum in
the calm zone of Capricorn exceeds the minimum near
the southern Arctic circle on the average more than 1.0
inch of the barometer, while the pressure in the calm
zone of Cancer exceeds that of latitude north 65° by '45
of an inch. See Table argument 115.

6. — The winds are not due to thermal convection re-
sulting from the sun's heat and polar cold, for in that
case, with the sun in the equator, at the base of the
atmosphere they would posess the greatest east to west
velocity on the line, and the calms of the doldrums be
unknown. On the equator the winds either average
calm, or blow from west to east, with the oceanic counter
current of this direction flowing on or near the line.

7. — The winds are not due to thermal convection
resulting from the sun's heat and polar cold, for in that
case they would blow steadily, which they do not, but
on the contrary are very variable, and would not de-
velope steep barometrical curves, elevations, depressions,
and storms. If the winds were thermal the contrasts of
pressure which develope storms could not exist. Even
night and day contrasts of temperature are unable to
develope storms, the calm of the evening where the
contrasts are strongest being proverbial.

8. — The winds are not due to thermal convection
resulting from the sun's heat and polar cold, for in that
case the highest average barometer would not be in the
calm zones of Cancer and Capricorn, but at the poles,
while the lowest barometer would not be in the Arctic
circles but in the circles of Cancer and Capricorn.

9. — Tho win Is are not d ue to thermal convection re-
sulting from t',ie sun's heat and polar cold, for in that
case the surface winds of the Earth would not blow from
the calm zones of Cancer and Capricorn, but move into
these zones. They would not blow towards the line be-
tween these circles, and towards the poles beyond these
circles but in the reverse directions, nor would the east
to west rush of the trade winds cease at the equator, if
we regard the sun as acting on the line, though in reality
his most powerful inflence with regard to raising the
temperature of the atmosphere, under himself, and pro-
moting convection, is when he is most stationary in lati-
tude, at the solstices, over the circles of Cancer and
Capricorn.

10. — The winds are not due to thermal convection re-
sulting from the sun's heat and Polar cold, for in that
case they would not issue steadily in a dual character
from the calm zones of Cancer and Capricorn, but move
into a single circle of latitude passing under the sun,
there would not be a duality resembling that of the tides
of the ocean.

11. — The winds are not due to barometrical pressure
of unchanging constancy in the calm zones of Cancer
and Capricorn, for in that case they would be constant
and steady, without their observed variableness.

12. — The winds are not due to a body shifting its
longitude and declination slowly as the sun, but also to
a body which shifts its position rapidly, modifying the
solar effects, both aiding and entering into conflict with
the latter, and this body can only bo the Moon, and
taken with known shifting of the calm zones, winds, and
other effects with the sun, annual changes, we must con-
clude that the atmospheric circulation and winds, arc
the product of Moon and Sun combined.

13. — Either of the arguments 4 to 10 are fatal to the
theory which regards the winds as arising from thermal
convection by the thermal influence of the sun's heat,
and polar cold, and collectively they are overwhelmingly
against it, and whether the winds are the product of the
sun and moon, or of both combined, thermal influences
aie altogether inadequate to explain the winds, either

ft

barometrically or dynamically considered, and act in di-
rections altogether contrary to the general barometrical
circulation and effects.

14. — If we admit that the moon has a large share in
making the winds, which is the universal opinion of
sailors, gardeners, shepherds, farmers, and every class
having an immediate and special interest in the weather,
and which has been a widely diffused opinion in all ages,
and can be found in the most ancient classical writings,
then we cannot assign this share to thermal influence.

15. — Taking the ascertained influence of the sun in
producing the winds and modifying their flow, and since
we find that the winds are not due to thermal influences,
what other force can the sun exert to make the winds,
other than thermal radiation.

16. — In so far as the Earth exerts a force to make
the winds, in connection with differences of barometric
pressures, we must assign the winds to gravitation act-
ing on the mobile atmosphere.

17. — Since gravitation makes the air movements or
winds arising from differences of barometric pressure,
may not gravitation be the force which makes the air
movement which gives rise to the differences of barome-
tric pressure.

18. — That is to say, the same force which deflects the
Earth in her orbit, may not this be the force which de-
flects the air, producing air movements giving rise to
differences of barometric pressure and the winds.

19. — We think that arguments 17 and 18 express the ac-
tual state of matters, in which case we must assign to the
Moon the largest share in the production of the winds,
consistent with argument 11, and conclude that the at-
mospheric circulation is due to solar and lunar gravita-
tion combined deflecting the Earth and air,

20.— Assigning the forces which produce the atmos-
pheric circulation of the Earth to gravitation of the Sun,
Moon, and Earth, we have in respect to the Sun and
Moon (a) tidal compress, and (I) orbital deflection of the
matter of the Earth and atmosphere as the only possible
sources of the circulation. Call thesa sourcs tidal com-
press and orbital force.

21.— Tidal compress, that resultant of gravitation act-
ing rectangular to the radius vector of the Earth with
respect to the Sun and Moon, is not sufficient to account
for the difference of air pressure between the calm zones
of the tropics, the regions of high barometer and sources
of the winds, and the pressure of the poles, the regions

of low barometer towards which the winds blow from
the tropics, for we cannot suppose the compress acting
alone, to exert a static force of barometric pressure
greater than itself. See argument 5.

22. — Hence we are compelled to assign the atmospheric
circulation not simply to tidal compress, but to orbital
Jo'ice as the predominant force.

23. — Orbital force is expressed in Kepler's 1st and 3rd
laws, which assert that the radius vector, or the line
drawn from a planet to the primary, describes equal
areas in equal times, and that the squares of the times of
the planetary revolutions are to each other as the cubes
of their mean distances, and when we apply these laws
to the particles of the atmosphere considered acting as
independent planets, about the Sun and Moon, modified
by the Earth's gravitation, then we discover that the
atmosphere is deflected by a force capable of accounting
for its circulation in every relation of observed effects,
whether we regard the distribution of barometric pres-
sure or the directions and velocity of the winds.

24. — If we describe a great circle of the Earth in the
plane of its movement about the Sun and Moon, the
plane of this circle will be inclined to that of the terres-
trial equator, and a diameter of this great circle, will
emerge from the Earth in the calm belts of Cancer and
Capricorn. The combined Moon and Sun may be re-
garded as revolving round this circle in a direction from
west to east, and the crests of the tidal compress revolv-
ing with them in this circle, which may be caUed the
TIDAL CIRCLE, the Moon outrunning the Sun, and the
tidal crests moving with the Moon, in opposite hemi-
spheres of the Earth.

25. — The crests of the tidal compress in argument 24,
are the ends of a prolate spheriod into which the atmos-
phere is compressed by the tidal compress of the Sun
and Moon, Of the two ends or crests in opposite hemi-
spheres of the Earth, the greatest extension towards
space is in the hemisphere illuminated by the Moon, or
we may say in the lunar day hemisphere. This follows
the application of the law that the force of tidal compress
varies -inversely as the cube of the distance from the primary.
This also holds for the orbital force as it affects the tidal
crests of the atmosphere.

26. — The tidal crests of the atmosphere are revolving
round the Earth's axis from west to east in] the Tidal
Circle, the great circle of argument 24, completing one
revolution in a lunar month, and the calm zones of the

8

tropics of Cancer and Capricorn may be regarded as the
solstices of the tidal crests. When the one crest is in the
solstice of Cancer, the other crest is in that of Capricorn,
and vice versa, hence the dual character of the barome-
tric zones or circles, giving rise to the atmospheric circu-
lation and winds, while the transition of the tidal crests
from solstice to solstice in a lunar month, accounts for
the ever shifting, ever changing, character of the winds.

27. — The air of the tidal crests is deflected by the or-
bital force of arguments 20 — 23, so that in respect to the
motion of the Earth in space, and in the plane of the
Tidal Circle, the particles outrun the Earth on the side
directed to the primary or point of attraction, and are
left behind on the off-side of the Earth removed from the
primary or centre of attraction, outrunning the Earth on
the one side and becoming left behind on the other, in the
plane of the Earth's motion through space, the plane of
the circle of the ends of the prolate spheriod of the tidal
compress, the plane of the Tidal Circle. This motion of
the atmosphere is against the Earth's rotation in both
hemispheres in respect to motion of the air over the sur-
face of the Earth. Thus the air of the tidal compress in
respect to the rotation of the Earth, is carried round over
the surface of the E&rth to positions west of the radius
vector of its motion in space, and that is so whether we
regard the Sun or Moon as the primary, or combine their
attractions in a single point, and consider the radius
vector of the tidal crests.

28. — We have called the circle of argument 24 the Tidal
Circle, because the tidal crests move in this circle,
whether we regard the atmosphere or ocean, though the
tidal crests of the atmosphere and ocean are in quadra-
ture to each other.

29. — The Tidal Circle posesses an accumulation of air
in excess of the rest of the atmosphere.

30. — The Earth in its rotation is cutting the Tidal
Circle, and cutting the accumulation of air in the Tidal
Circle in respect to all regions in the equatorial zone ly-
ing within the calm belts of Cancer and Capricorn or
solstices of the tidal crests, in respect that the tidal crests
only make the circuit of the Earth in a lunar month, while
the Earth completes a rotation in 24 hours, thus relative
to the rotating Earth, the air of the Tidal Circle is moving
from east to west.

31. — In cutting the Tidal Circle, the equatorial and
tropical regions of the Earth, passing under the accumu-
lated air of this circle, share the excess of the barome-

BENTHALL, BROSELEY, SHROPSHIRE, ENGLAND.

Showina the Pioneer Iron Bridge of the World, built over the river Severn, in 1779, by the Coalbrookdale Iron Com]
The white cross on the abutments marks the site of the cottage where JOHN JONES,* the Author of this
Kinetic Universe," was born on February 5 in, 1851.

* Author also of "The Ccral Theory of the Lunar Structures," " New Selenography," "The Sun a Dynamo," ^c., &c.

tricat pressure of the Tidal Circle, and carry the acsuniU-
lated air round the Earth, along the circles of latitude of
those regions which cut the Tidal Circle.

32. — Thus the barometrical excess of pressure of the
Tidal Circle is distributed over the circles of latitude
within the calm zones of Cancer and Capricorn, in pro-
portion as these circles of latitude underly the Tidal
Circle.

33.— It follows from arguments 30, 31, and 32, that
since the circles of latitude occupied by the calm belts
of Cancer and Capricorn underly the Tidal Circle to the
greatest extent of all terrestrial circles, that these circles
receive the greatest amount of air accumulated by the
tidal compress and orbital force of arguments 20 — 23, hence
when averages of air pressure are taken over all the
Earth, the highest barometer is in the calm belts of
Cancer and Capricorn, gradually diminishing as we move
linewards towards the equator, where the circles of lati-
tude are both larger and underly the Tidal Circle to a
less extent, and rapidly diminishing as we recede from
the calm belts of Cancer and Capricorn towards the
poles, and in those regions of the Earth which do not cut
the Tidal Circle, and of polar tidal trough, from which
the air is being continuously withdrawn, to feed the con-
tinuous action of the tidal compress and orbital deflection
of arguments 19 — 23. Hence when averages are taken
the calm belts of Cancer and Capricorn contain the bar-
ometrical pressure giving rise to the trade winds within
the tropics, and the pole-going winds beyond the tropics,
but the real source of the atmospheric circulation is the
Tidal Circle, the patli of the tidal crests, the path of the
prolate spheroid into which the tidal and orbital forces
compress and deflect the particles of the atmosphere, of
which circle the greatest proportion in respect to latitude
lies in the calm zones of Cancer and Capricorn, where
the tangent to the circles of latitude and Tidal Circle are
in the same line or parallel.

34. — The tidal compress is directed into the Tidal
Circle rectangular to the latter, the orbital force deflection
of the air is directed round the Earth from east to west,
in the plane of the Tidal Circle, and most forcibly in the
regions about the radius vector of the Earth with respect
to the Moon and Sun, or her motion in space, and it
follows that the outflow of air from the Tidal Circle, as
wind,is directed from the Tidal Circle at right angles to
itself, flowing most forcibly from the base of the atmos-
phere and decreasingly with elevation above the surfacQ

io

of the Earth. From the calm belts of Cancer and Capri-
corn, the average outflow is directed meridionally line-
wards and polewards, while on the equator the average
outflow is directed polewards into both the north and
south hemispheres of the Earth. To supply the outflow
from the Tidal Circle there are descending currents,
hence in respect to the terrestrial equator, we have de-
scending currents, and currents directed meridionally
towards the poles of the Earth. These currents give a
calm belt on the equator, that of the doldrums, by reason
of the air particles descending from higher and greater
circles to smaller circles of lower level, thus acquiring a
west to east motion or impetus which balances or over-
comes the east to west motion of the trade winds as these
approach the Equator.

35. — In the calm belts of Cancer and Capricorn, the
average flow from the Tidal Circle is meridional, directed
linewards and polewards, fed by descending currents, — as
are all the outgoing winds of the Tidal Circle, round
its whole circuit, — hence in the calm belts of Cancer and
Capricorn the motion of the air is either from west to
east or dead calm, as with the equatorial calm belt, and
arising similarly.

36. — The atmosphere as a whole is retarded in respect
to the Earth's rotation by the orbital force of arguments
19 — 23, and therefore as a whole moves from east to west
over the Earthen the direction of the positive electric cur-
rents or Amperean resultant of the terrestrial magnetism,
and tiie direction of the travel of the Earth's magnetic
pole in the secular inequality, which magnetic effects and
travel of the magnetic pole may be related to this travel
of the atmosphere.

37. — The position of the greatest barometrical pressure
of the atmosphere, in the Tidal Circle, are the positions
of low tide of the ocean.

38.— The low tide of the ocean, the greatest depressions
of the troughs or basins of the oceanic tides, are pro-
duced by the excess of barometrical pressure of the air
overlying the ocean troughs, and the outgoing winds
passing from these regions of high pressure, the pressure
and winds pressing and blowing out the water into the
regions of lower pressure of the air, the regions of high
tide of the ocean. Lowest level of the ocean lies under the
Tidal Circle,and highest level of the ocean at quadrature
to the Tidal Circle,andas the Earth rotates inside the Ti-
dal Circle of the atmosphere, and in respect to terrestrial
longitude, the Tidal Circle is cut twice in each

11

synodic rotation, with respect to the Moon, and so in op-
posite hemispheres of the Earth at points 12 lunar hours
apart, there occur two flows and two ebbs of the ocean
in a lunar clay. But as there are two barometrical maxi-
mums, that of the lunar day and lunar night, upon oppo-
site sides of the terrestrial equator in each hemisphere,
and these constantly shifting their positions in the Tidal
Circle with the motion of the Moon in declination, and
the side of the Earth next the Moon possessing the
greater barometrical maximum, there arise inequalities
in the successive tides.

39. — At times having regard to the positions of the Sim
and Moon and their action in the Tidal Circle, air is pour-
ing from the Northern hemisphere into the Southern, at
other times from the Southern into the Northern.

40. — Thus the oceanic tides are caused by the forces of
argument 20, tidal compress and orbital jorce acting on the
mobile air of the Earth, the movements of the oceanic
tides being produced by and being secondary to the
movements of the atmosphere, and in reverse order,
piling of the atmosphere in the Tidal Circle being accom-
panied by withdrawal of ocean waters, and vice versa.

41. — The oceanic currents are produced by the barome-
tric and wind movements of the atmosphere, and are
secondary to the movements of the atmosphere, the at-
mosphere acting directly or by means of the tides.

42. — The continental projections and mountain chains
of the Earth compressthe air on their eastern sides, as they
impinge against and collide with the west going atmosphere
the latter retarded by the orbital force of argument 20.

43. — Hence the continents may be said to have a wind-
ward and a leeward side, the eastern being the wind-
ward side, and the western the leeward side.

44. — The compress of argument 42 determines an ex-
cess of barometric pressure,and an out flow of air and wind
going polewards over the surface of the Earth, on the
eastern or windward sides of the continents, and de-
ficiency of barometric pressure and a wind going line-
wards i.e. towards the equator on the western or lee-
ward sides.

45. — The winds of argument 44 determine those which
passing up the eastern shores and coast of North America,
stretch across the Atlantic over the Gulf Stream, aiding
to produce the latter, and then pass down the western
shores and coast of Europe and back along the southern
rim of the Sargossa Sea, determining a swirl of water
round the North Atlantic basin round this sea, which air

18

movement may be denominated the Sarseraw, and which
passing over the region of Britain, brings gales and
storms to our coasts, as well as climatical ameliorations.

46. — Round the rim of the Atlantic basin, coursing on
the Sarseraw; storm depressions created in the tropics,
round the centres of which the wind is moving against
the clock hands, come to Britain at intervals related to
those of the tides, twenty-four lunar hours being an im-
portant interval as regards pressure and wind, as also
the half of this period, the tidal interval. The solar day
is also an important interval. There are day and night-
tide effects developed on the Sarseraw, as its current
cuts the tidal circle, day-produced storm centres with
humidity, night-produced storm centres with dryness,
with dry and humid anti-cyclonic centres.

47. — In other oceanic basins and parts of the world,
similar currents to the Sarseraw are developed by the
continental projections colliding with the tidally retarded
air,retarded by the orbital force of arguments 19 — 23, the
atmosphere moving over the Earth bodily from east to
west in consequence of those forces, though it doubles
back near the poles, the recoil of the equatorial impact.

48. — As already indicated, the counter oceanic current
of the equatorial zone of the ocean, is due to descending
currents of air acquiring a motion from west to east in
excess of the Earth's rotation by their descent, but it
may be aided by the compress under consideration,which
compress is most powerful in the equatorial regions
where the tangential velocity of the Earth's surface is
greatest. In this case the counter current of the ocean
is really a counter current, but due to the motion of the
atmosphere.

49. — Apart from the currents of the ocean due to the
circulation under the tidal compress and orbital force of ar-
guments 19 — 23, all the great currents of the ocean will
be found to underly and move with currents of the at-
mosphere produced by the compress on the windward
or eastern sides of the continents as they meet the
tidally retarded atmosphere.

50. — Conflict and change every moment is the law of
the atmosphere,a condition of things altogether different
to what would prevail were the circulation of the atmos-
phere due to thermal influences and thermal convection.
Yet the greater winds have their definite circuits, which
may be charted out under a due consideration of the
tidal forces of arguments 19— 23, and their application to
the problems of the weather.

IS

51. — The surface winds of the Earth are produced by
descending currents of air acting in those regions where,
if they were due to thermal influences of the sun the
currents would be ascending currents, and it is physic-
ally impossible that these descending currents can be
due to thermal influence.

52. — Geographical contour or any distribution of land
sea and air, cannot explain the reversal of what thermal
considerations would lead us to expect and the conditions
of the atmospheric circulation, static, barometric, and
dynamic, are exactly the reverse of what any thermal
theory would require.

53. — Therefore the thermal theory must be completely
abandoned, and give place to the only other possible
one, viz.. the GRAVITATIONAL or TIDAL Theory.

54. — The heat of the sun maintains the atmosphere of
the Earth in a mobile condition, and condition of great
extension, but the tidal forces alone produce the barome-
tric differences, oscillations, winds, and circulation of the
atmosphere. These forces are (1) gravitation of the Sun,
Moon, and Earth, (2) the orbital motions of the Earth
and atmosphere under the primary impulses, (3) the
Earth's rotation.

55. — The friction and collision of the Earth and atmos-
phere and the winds develope heat, which is radiated
into space. The Earth is losing rotation equivalent to
this lost energy. The atmosphere not the ocean is the
tidal brake, retarding the Earth's rotation by an amount
which comes under observation.

56. — The Atmosphere may be regarded as rushing
bodily from east to west, colliding with the continental
projections of the Earth, and developing eddies, whirls,
compressions, depressions, anticyclones, cyclones, but
the fundamental source of its circulation is the Tidal
Circle, where the plane of the Earth's movement in space
cuts the surface of the Earth, and the fundamental forces
of the circulation are the tidal forces as given in argu-
ments 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, and'54.

57, — The Tidal Circle of argument 24 is the plane in
which excess of barometric pressure, is initiated with-
drawing pressure from polar regions, and giving rise to
the barometric maximums of the calm belts of the tropics
those of Cancer and Capricorn, from which issue the
great movements of the atmosphere. The semi-diurnal
barometric oscillation marks tbe movements of the at-
mosphere in and about the Tidal Circle, the depression
in the barometric oscillation being due to outflow of air

14

received 'from the Tidal Circle when cutting the same,
and then passing into quadrature with the Tidal Circle
by the rotation of the Earth, the air flows away by the
superior pressure without an equivalent compensation
from the tidal forces. If the Sun and Moon were in con-
junction and stationary over the Earth, there would be a
great circle of barometrical minimum constituting the
tidal trough of the atmosphere and cutting the equator
of the Earth. The barometric minimum though attained
near the poles of the Earth, where tidal trough always
prevails, is only approximated near the equator when in
quadrature with the aerial tidal crest, the air not having
time to flow off before succeeding tides pile it up again
Hence we have only a comparatively small semi-diurnal
oscillation of the barometer and a constant excess of air
pressure in the latitudes cutting the Tidal Circle.

58. — In the two positions of the Tidal Circle where the
barometric pressure of the Tidal Circle is a maximum in
the semi-diurnal oscillation, in these two positions the
ocean waters are lowest, constituting ebb tide, while in
two positions at quadrature with the Tidal Circle, where
the barometric pressure is a minimum in the semi-diurnal
oscillation, the ocean waters are highest constituting low
tide. 1 hese conclusions apply to mid ocean, and from
these positions the tides are transmitted to the shores of
the continents under time intervals dependent upon con-
tour of the ocean and shores. The shore tides are all of
the nature of a drift and secondary to the great mid ocean
movements.

50. — At any given moment the solid Earth is moving
through space in a single direction only, the resultant of
its primary or cosmical motion, and gravitation to the
Sun and Moon, or of all the forces to which it may be
subject. At the same moment every particle of the at-
mosphere is moving in a different direction to the solid
Earth, and as many different directions to each other as
there are particles. But the particles of the atmosphere
have their motions combined more or less,' so that they
move more or less collectively in different directions, and
these movements acted on by terrestrial gravity consti-
tute the atmospheric circulation. They give rise to the
tides and currents of the ocean, which tides and cur-
rents of the ocean are the barometric expression of the
atmospheric movements, regarding the ocean bed as the
mercury chamber of the barometer, and the ocean waters
as the mercury acted on by the pressure and movements
of the atmosphere, the waters moving and rising and fall-

is

ing iu the ocean bed as does the mercury in the chamber
and tube of the barometer. When we deal with the tides
and their movements, we are dealing with a barometer
of the size of the ocean bed, and which records both
pressures and movements of the air.

60. — The Tidal Circle of this paper already defined in
argument 24, and so frequently referred to in the several
arguments, is a great circle of the Earth, or more pro-
perly of the atmosphere, stretching between the calm belts
of Cancer and Capricorn in a plane inclined to the Earth's
axis so as to just touch these belts in the highest latitude
touched by the circle. rJhe Earth is rotating on its own
axis in the Tidal Circle in a synodic period of one
lunar or tidal day. The tides whether we regard
the primary atmospheric or secondary oceanic,
pass round the flidal Circle in one lunar or tidal
month, the tides of the lunar day and lunar night passing
alternately to the highest declination in the Cancer or
and Capricorn calm zones. Thus in each lunar
month each hemisphere alternately receive a visit of the
lunar day and lunar night tides at the highest declination.
Lunar day in this clause, is when the Moon is in the same
hemisphere as the observer, lunar night when it is in the
opposite hemisphere.

61.' — For a proper understanding of the weather, it is
desirable to refer all barometric observations, and direc-
tions and force of wind, not so much to the equator of
the Earth as to the Tidal Circle.

62.— The Tidal Circle is the most important factor in
weather phenomena,and f rom it issue all weather effects.

63. — In the movements of the atmosphere every region
of the Earth is in a condition subordinate to that of the
Tidal Circle.

64. — The conditions of the atmosphere under its varied
movements constitute it such, that if we could see the
matter composing it, we should find the atmosphere to
consist as it were of continents, islands, mountains, val-
leys, rivers, seas, and oceans, anticyclones being the
denser or continental developments in which the air is
accumulated in great quantity, mountains the local re-
gions of accumulated air ; and in the valleys between
these dense air continents and mountains there are rivers
of air rushing to the atmospheric seas and oceans where
the barometer is low. All these developments are on
the greatest scale at New and Full Moon, consequently
at these periods, whether we consider direct or in-
direct action by the Moon, the rivers of air rush

fastest, and the winds blow strongest, while at the time
of eclipses of the Sun and Moon, storms are of unusually
great violence.

65. — While the continents, mountains, valleys, rivers,
seas, and oceans of the air are ever shifting, shifting like
the sands of the sea, all shifting with the tides, yet just
as the beds of sand permanently affect districts which can
be mapped out; so the general distribution and move-
ments of the atmosphere possess more or less permanent
features which can be charted.

66. — There is a permanent feature of the atmosphere
already indicated which we have denominated the
Sarseraw. The Sarseraw is a great river or current of
air hundreds of miles in breadth, moving round the
North Atlantic basin, with the clock hands, skirting the
Atlantic shores, and sweeping over the land of eastern
North America and Western Europe. All round the At-
lantic basin along the course of the Sarseraw are a series
of elevations and depressions of the barometer, corre-
sponding to high and low tide, to crest and trough, im-
posed on the Sarseraw air river as it touches or cuts the
Tidal Circle in its course, the lower latitude limits of the
Sarseraw touching the higher latitude limits of the Tidal
Circle, in or near the calm zones of Cancer. On the
Sarseraw the tidal movements of the air in the tropics
are impressing themselves in an ebb and flow, and writ-
ing their movements on the Sarseraw in characters as
plainly discernable as those of the pen. In Britain when
we look upwards at the sky, we can see the Sarseraw
current passing almost at any time, often marked by
transverse wave clouds, but this current while steadily
flowing in nearly the same direction, is ever changing in
character and intensity.

67.— The velocity of movement of the air composing
the Sarseraw current is different at different portions of
the lunar month, moving fastest when the tides are run-
ning highest, and slowest when the tides are running
slowest.

68. — There are barometrical elevations and depressions
on the Sarseraw of dry character accompanying night
ebbs and flows of the Tidal Circle from and to the Sarse-
raw, and barometrical elevation and depressions of humid
character accompanying day ebbs and flows, these alter-
nating conditions of dryness and humidity, and high and
low barometer, round the course of the Sarseraw, being
imposed in or near the tropics.

69. — If a very deep depression pass over Britain, mov-

JOHN JONES,

Author ot this Treatise, "A Kinetic Universe." From a photograph taken when 16
years of age. Born at Benthall, Broseley, Shropshire, England, February 5th,
'1851. Son of William and Maria Palin Jones, of Broseley and Sheriff nales
parentage respectively, and Broseley residence during the boyhood of the Author
of this Treatise.

1?

ing on the Sarseraw, a lunar month afterwards a similar
depression may be expected to pass over our meridian,
but the latitude may not be the same, and the depression
may pass to the North or South of Britain, and its pas-
sage be accelerated or retarded a few hours.

70. — If a very wet phase pass over our meridian, mov-
ing on the Sarseraw, a lunar month afterwards a similar
wet phase may be expected to pass over our meridian.
Its passage may be accelerated or retarded a few hours.

71. — It is the motion in latitude, with the varying
declinations of the Sun and Moon, of the features of the
Sarseraw, its currents, storms, and phases, which has
prevented the earlier recognition of the monthly re-
currences.

72. — The phases 69 and 70, though these may be
shifted in latitude at successive passages, the direction
of the shift, whether to the north or south can easily be
calculated, from the laws of acceleration or retardation
of the Sarseraw flow, and expansions and contractions
of the whole circuit on its centre, the condition and
position of the whole being dependent upon the positions
of the Sun and Moon, and upon whether the tidal forces
are increasing or decreasing in successive lunations, and
whether the Sun and Moon are proceeding north or pro-
ceeding south in their courses.

73. — The Sarseraw is initiated and sustained most for-
cibly, and receives the greatest push round and
impetus of air by the tidal forces, when the tides run
highest at New and Full Moon, that is in the greatest de-
gree at spring tides.

74. — At neap tides the Sarseraw receives feebler sup-
plies of air and pushes than at spring tides, and its cur-
rents are then moving slowest.

75. — The Sarseraw curretns have an average period de-
pendant upon distance from the centre of the Sargossa
Sea, it constituting a great whirlpool of air round the
sea, with a sufficient centrifugal force or tangential tend-
ency on tli3 Welters, as to render the centre of this sea,
actually lower than the rim of the North Atlantic and
general ocean level.

76. — Yet the lunar monthly return of phase on the
Sarseraw on our meridian in our latitudes, when the
changes of declination and intensity are allowed for, is
independent of the period of the Sarseraw currents, re-
garded as a river or whirl of air.

77. — In considerations of local weather affecting Britain,
whether we regard seasonal climate, or the visits of

is

storms, a chart of the Sarseraw,1 and a knowledge of the
distribution of its barometric pressures and currents is
the great desideratum for successful weather predictions.
78.— But from the position of the Sun and Moon, and
that of the Tidal Circle, and the condition of the latter,
the weather of the world may be largely calculated and
predicted, and meteorological science be made to evolve
law and order for what at present appears to be chaos.

79. — It is not for the writer to attempt to exhaust the
subject, an attempt which would be futile for any single
individual, but only to indicate the great principles of the
weather, viz. that "these are tidal and due to the primary
impulse of the Earth through space, acted on by gravita-
tion to the Sun and Moon, moving the Earth and mobile
atmosphere in different directions, so that if we regard
the solid Earth as moving in the proper orbit, then the
perturbations of the mobile atmosphere by gravitation
to the Sun and Moon is the source of the atmospberic
movements, and circulation by these perturbations is the
cause of the oceanic tides.

80. — While on the Sarseraw, given conditions or phases
return in our latitudes and in its course generally in a
lunar^ month, there are phases which more locally recur
in a lunar day.

81. — Thus if the barometer rise suddenly by the pas-
sage of a high tide of the air barometrical elevation on
the Sarseraw, then 24 lunar hours afterwards the baro-
meter may give another jump.

82. — Again, if the barometer fall suddenly by the pas-
sage of a low tide of the air barometrical depression on
the Sarseraw, then 24 lunar hours afterwards it may
give another fall.

83. — Thus by 81 & 82 the barometer will attain its
highest and lowest points in our regions by successive
jumps, its usual method of rising and falling.

84.— But storm elevations and depressions may be re-
garded as due to currents and eddies of the air under
great tidal movements of the atmosphere, due to conflicts
of air, and air and land, rather than to the great atmos-
pheric tide directly. The latter is expressed by the
semi-diurnal barometrical oscillation, which does not
oscillate the barometer in the general movement so much
as currents and eddies do locally. Two currents meet-
ing or passing to the same region, pile up the pressure
as with the tidal compress and orbital force, but two
currents receding from each other or from tho same
point, make a barometric depression, while the wind

19

rushing past or over a mass of dense stationary accu-
mulated air, makes a barometrical depression in rear of
the latter. Yet the semi-diurnal barometrical interval
whether we regard the action of the Sun or Moon singly,
or combined in the greater tidal barometrical oscillation
of the semi tidal day, will make itself felt in the return
of weather phases from day to day, and tide to tide.

85. — Weather prediction would have been a simple
matter if the atmospheric circulation had been due to
thermal convection, though in that case the circulation
would have reached vanishing point, and the Earth had
been a rainless, sterile, uninhabited desert.

86. — Hence although the weather phenomena is compli-
cated, it is a consolation that apart from these complica-
tions; we should not have been here to study it and feel
its benign influences, and its change of position with
that of the plane of the lunar orbit.

87. — Blame the changes in the Tidal Circle, if the
weather appears to be erratic.

88. — With the Sun and Moon both engaged now aiding
each other, now in conflict, their combined effects produc-
ing the atmospheric circulation, it must necessarily be
very much more complicated than if only one body was
concerned in its production.

89. — The Sun's thermal influence must be regarded as
producing some convection, but the tidal forces outweigh
and suppress its manifestation, which has already been
shown in the previous arguments.

90. — If we recognise the thermal influence, it can only
be as a disturbing force producing further complication.

91. — We must be very careful even in assigning land
and sea breezes of a local character to thermal influences,
or why the proverbial calm of the evening when we have
heat and cold most contrasted, and in close juxtaposition.

92. — If we turn to Horace's Odes, (L. 1 ,25) we read
'- The Thradan North wind raging more about the change
of the Moon, than at other timt-s. So Livy, iv. 20, "Inter-
luniorum dies tempestatibus plenos navigantibus quam
maxime metuendos, non solum peritiae ratio, sed etiam
vulgi usus intelligit ;" i.e. " Reason and experience has
made appear, even to the observation of the vulgar, that
at the change of the Moon, when the Earth is placed
betwixt the Sun and her, that period of time is rendered
very tempestuous, and greatly to be feared by seamen,
and others who sail upon the seas." Certain new moons
are certainly the most dangerous storm positions that
can occur, even more dangerous than full moons,

20

93. — The observations and experience of seamen, shep-
herds, gardeners, and in the words of Livy, even of the
vulgar with regard to weather, surpasses in the results,
those obtained by the closeted physicists, astronomers,
meteorologists, and others, who have asserted that the
lunar influence on the weather is only moonshine, and
regarded almost as lunatics those who have asserted
that the Moon does really influence the weather.

94. — Those who ought to have known better, have
been asserting that the Moon possessed no force which
could appreciably influence the weather.

95. — If the Moon can shift the entire solid globe over
many miles of space, over the course of the Earth's
orbit about the common centre of gravity, swaying the
Earth as a mother does a baby in its arms ; then just as
the robes of the baby are swayed in the process, so the
air robing the Earth as loosely as the baby's clothes, is
swayed by the Moon, in both cases with subsidiary
eddies and currents of air.

96. — The Sun and Moon shaking out the atmospheric
robes of the Earth, sway vast volumes of air, now to this
hand and now to that, as the Earth undulates up and
down in the gravitative arms of the Sun and Moon, but
as the baby's robes flow up and dowrn regularly to the
rhythmic tossing by the mother, so the movements of
the atmosphere on the large scale under the tidal forces
of the Sun and Moon are equally regular, and in equally
definite directions which can be calculated and predicted
with mathematical precision.

97. — It is an easy matter to calculate what is the path
of the solid Earth, and initially what is the position and
condition of the Tidal Circle and path of the air, as the
Earth is moved by gravitation of the Sun and Moon and
the air is swayed by the tidal forces.

98. — Nor is it difficult to follow the air in its courses
with respect to the main channels.

99. — The lowest barometer near the poles of the Earth
and the highest in the tropics of Cancer and Capricorn,
the difference of pressure of these minima and maxima
of terrestrial atmospheric pressure, these differences of
pressure are not merely effects, but are the actual causes
of the atmospheric circulation in respect to the winds
blowing over the surface of the Earth, and just as in a
storm, the air moves from the region of high to the region
of low barometer, so whatever be its circuits and the
channels that its motions may favour, the air is continu-
ity moving fropi the tropics towards the poles as winds,'

21

in a manner in which the poles may be regarded as great
storm centres, and similarly from the calm zones of Can-
cer and Capricorn towards the lesser barometric mini-
mum on the equator.

100. — And the difference of barometric pressure be-
tween the calm zones of the tropics of Cancer
and Capricorn and the poles, is a measure of the
tidal forces exerted on the air, (not thermal forces, since
the latter act in exactly opposite directions, and if ex-
istent have to be overcome before the tidal effects are a
possible quantity at all, thus further exalting the ex-
pression of the tidal forces), but not the full measure,
formation of the polar depression and filling up again
by the air are going on simultaneously. Hence the static
expression of the tidal forces of arguments 19 — 24, and
54, as between the calm zones of Cancer and Capricorn
and the poles considerably exceed *7 inch of barometric
pressure difference between these regions, and give an
atmospheric circulation proportionate to this, between
these regions. To express the whole tidal force we have
also to consider the circulation directed towards the
equator from tbe tropical calm zones. The whole force
of the atmospheric circulation may be said to be devel-
oped in the Tidal Circle. And allowing for a little dif-
ference of inclination due to the Sun, the position of the
Tidal Circle round the Earth, is ever the plane of the
lunar orbit. And the tables which govern the position
of the Moon, and the lunar cycles, are all applicable to
the Tidal Circle subject to corrections for aberation by
the Sun. And for first rough approximations we may
consider the Tidal Circle as in the plane of the path of
the Moon round the Earth, although to be correct the
two circles are inclined a little to each other, but by an
amount never exceeding 5°.

101. — In so far as the heat of the Sun and thermal
convection draws air into the tropics, the tidal forces of
the Tidal Circle use this air only to pile up the pressure
in the Tidal Circle, and thus give results exactly op-
posite to what thermal action acting alone would give.

102. — The actual expression of the tidal forces is the
dynamic energy of the winds of the Earth, the whole of
which is balanced against the retarding forces, friction
with the Earth's surface, and impact against its rotation.
Were it not for impact and friction, the atmosphere
would become nearly stationary relative to the rotating
Earth, only rotating on the axis once in a lunar month, and
become a wind on the Earth moving against the rotation

22

from east to west with a velocity attaining nearly 1000
miles per hour on the equator.

103. — The tidal forces 19 — 24, and 54, are engaged re-
tarding the atmosphere, the ictaticn of the Earth is en-
gaged accelerating it, and in a semi-lunar month tie
Sun andjMoon alternately superpose their effects and act
in quadrature, and though the tides vary in height in
consequence, yet the combined retardation is always the
sum of their actions, their united actions giving rise to
an atmospheric belt of high pressure, the Tidal Circle,
along which the pressure varies and is variable from
point to point with reference to the positions of the Sun
and Moon, but which belt of high pressure is always a
weight or mass of air moving against the Earth's rotation,
and causing the tides, as the meridians of the Earth
transit the circle or come into quadrature with the same,
and as the air rushes directly along the Tidal Circle.
Properly speaking there are two Tidal Circles, one of the
Moon the other of the Sun, situated; in the plane of the
orbits of these bodies, the Ecliptic plane and that of the
lunar orbit respectively, and these two Tidal Circles
sometimes superpose their effects, and at other times act
in quadrature, according as the Moon and Sun are in
corjunctiou or at quadrature, and according to the posi-
tion of the Sun in its annual course. There being two
Tidal Circles, that of the Moon and that of the Sun, this
is another source of atmospheric complication, conflict,
and commotion.

104.— When the Sun is going south and most rapidly,
from July to October, a proportion of his tidal piling of
the air by the forces 19 — 21, 54, is being withdrawn from
the calm zone of Cancer and the tropics of the Northern
hemisphere, then the pressure of these regions finding
itself proportionately unsupported, bursts along the
course of the Sarseraw, into depressions formed along
its course accompanying the movement, and the wind
attains unusual violence, giving rise to the West India
hurricanes. Similarly when the Sun is coming North
from Jan. to April, air is being withdrawn from the calm
zone of Capricorn and the tropics of the Southern hemi-
sphere, then the pressure of these regions bursts along
the course of an Indian Ocean southern hemisphere
Sarseraw, (which we may call the Indian Sarseraw, and
which swirls round the Indian Ocean in a manner similar
to the Atlantic Sarseraw, and overlies and is charted out
by the south equatorial current and other currents of the
Indian Ocean,) and produces the hurricanes of the Indian

Ocean of the type of the Rodriguez hurricane of April,
1843. The hurricanes of the North Atlantic, Indian
Ocean, and 'the Typhoon storms of Japan, all move on air
swirls or currents of permanent type, Sarseraws, con-
nected with the banking of the air on the westward or
windward side of the continents of North America, Asia,
and Africa respectively, as the rotating world meets the
tidally retarded atmosphere, retarded by the forces of
arguments 19 — 24, and 54.

105. — The development of hurricanes in the Northern
hemisphere, will be most intense when the Sun and
Moon are both in conjunction, and both travelling south
from July to October, while in the southern hemisphere
they will have their maximum development and force
when the Sun and Moon are both travelling north to-
gether from January to April. At these times pressure
is falling fastest in the tropics of Cancer and Capricorn
respectively.

106. — When we examine the Sun, we find that the
solar circulation, almost precisely resembles that of our
atmosphere. As with the latter the circulation in the
Sun is not thermal but gravitational and tidal, viz., de-
scending currents in the equator of the solar atmosphere,
with two zones of maximum barometric pressure in the
higher latitudes of the Sun. The sun spots move in what
may be denominated the trade winds of the Sun, that is
to say, in a strata of the solar atmosphere which is mov-
ing against the Sun's rotation and towards the solar
equator, just as the trade wind strata of the Earth
moves against the Earth's rotation and towards the ter-
restrial equator. On the solar equator there is a calm
resembling that of the Doldrums of the Earth, and due
similarly to descending currents, and to the tidal atmos-
pheric currents of the Sun passing polewards from the
solar equator just as they do on the terrestrial
equator. And the solar circulation is such as to indicate
that there is a large intra mercurial planet whose orbit
is very much inclined to that of the solar equator, with
a tidal circle whose highest solar declination touches the
higher limits of the spot zones, say approximately in-
clined 45° to the solar equator. This planet, (or planets,
for there may be two) has a tidal circle lying across the
solar equator in the plane of which the tidal compress of
this planet, and the orbital force of the Sun about this
planet, piles up the solar atmosphere, producing a baro-
metric pressure at the base of the solar atmosphere
which gives rise to the observed circulation of the photo-

24

Sphere. The solar tidal circle is subjected to perturba-
tions by the gravitation of the Sun to Jupiter, and other
planets in conjunction with Jupiter and the intra mer-
curial planet, hence the sun spots developed in the solar
tidal circle, are continually shifting their distribution in
respect to latitude in the Sun. The sun spots are de-
veloped in what may be denominated the hurricane re-
gions of the Sun, but do not necessarily mark hurricanes
in the Sun but rather the cloudless rainless regions
of the Sun, a state of the solar atmosphere similar to that
which prevails over the rainless districts of the Earth,
and probably arising from similar causes and marking
continental development in the Sun. The cloudless,
rainless condition imposed on portions of the solar
atmosphere constitute the sun spot openings in the pho-
tospherial cloud envelope, and though the source may be
continental,moving with the solid globe of theSun in the
period of rotation, the spots themselves move in the tidal
drift or circulation, from east to west in the Sun; and
against the rotation unless on the equator of the Sun.
The Sun at the base of the solar atmosphere is a solid
globe; and the movements of the sun spots on the solar
equator, their period gives the nearest approximation to
that of the rotation of this globe, since the solar equator
is the circle of calms or doldrums in the Sun. We must
proceed polewards in the Sun beyond the latitude 35°
before we reach the Cancer and Capricorn calm zoues
of the Sun, but doubtless these exist there. To deter-
mine these is to determine the inclination of the Tidal
Circle in the Sun, and approximately that of the orbit of
the intra mercurial planet. The sun spots have a pro-
per motion in the period of revolution of the intra mer-
curial planet which may be made of use to indicate the
position of the latter, the plane of its orbit, and its period,
and thus lead to its detection and the ascertaining of all
the elements of its orbit. As the intra mercurial planet
revolves round the Sun, the condition of the Tidal Circle
of the Sun varies with respect to atmospheric piling and
pressure, the trade wind zones of the Sun move alter-
nately north and south in the Sun; with the motions of
the intra mercurial planet, just as they do on the Earth,
with the Sun's annual movements across the terrestrial
equator, and just as they do doubtless with respect to
the Moon's monthly movements across the terrestrial
equator. The movements of our atmosphere in respect
to the shifting ef the winds, rains, and currents of the
ocean, and following the march of the Sun in its annual

JOHN JONES,

Author of " The Sun a Magnet," " Planetary Ring Theory of the Ice Age and Flood,"
discoverer of the Coralline Character of the Lunar Structures, Author of this
Treatise, "A Kinetic Universe," propounder of the Kinetic Theory of Gravitation,
&c., &c., &c. Born at Benthall, Broseley, Shropshire, England, February 5th,
1851. From a photograph at 21 years of age.

25

course, are in great part typical of those which follow
the Moon in its monthly course, and just as in the year
we have times when March winds blow strongly, and
other times when November fogs burst upon us, so in the
lunar month we have wind positions and fog positions,
and similarly as we have rainy seasons of the year so
we have rainy portions of the lunar month, and all these
changes whether solar or lunar are produced by the
forces 19 — 24; 54, the tidal forces, acting 011 the atmo-
sphere, ever pressing and deflecting it in directions
which can easily be calculated, once it is recognised that
the atmospheric circulation is tidal and not thermal.

107. — We havo mentioned the solar circulation, because,
when we correlate all kindred phenomena, we are better
able to generalize, than when we study the Earth and its
atmosphere only, and are enabled to put the views an-
nounced to every possible test. And when we find calm
on the equator in both the Sun and the Earth, consistent
with descending not ascending currents, and when we
find that the Tidal Circle gives off currents only pole-
wards on the equator which necessarily demands de-
scending currents and calm on the equator if the descent
is sufficiently rapid, and yet find currents going out from
the tropics towards the equator and apparently none re-
turning into the tropics below to supply the output, we
are bound to conclude that the indraught into the tropics
is an indraught by tidal compress to supply the output
resulting from the excess of barometrical pressure in the
tidal circle, imposed by the orbital deflection of the par-
ticles of the atmosphere as these endeavour to follow
Kepler's three laws in their course round the primary.
And if we graphically describe the orbit of the Earth
about the Sun or Moon, and measure off the area de-
scribed by the Earth's centre in a small elementary por-
tion of time, and then if we do the same for a particle of
air on the radius vector, the difference of arc or its sine
in that time, will give the force of the acceleration deflect-
ing the particle round the Earth from east to west over
the surface. This deflection of air demands a supply to
replace the air removed, and the deflection is in the place
of the tidal circle, and the supply is by the tidal compress
rectangular to this plane, the opposite direction to the
output of air from the Tidal Circle, the supply being an
indraught of low tension, affecting almost the entire
depth of the atmosphere, and the output an output of
high tension due to the compress or weight of the air on
the base of the tidal circle, hence the particles of air move
slowly into the tidal circle at every level except the base,

from which they rush out to produce the atmospheric
circulation. And if we draw the tidal circle cutting the
equator, and draw lines at right angles to it representing
the force and velocity of the air output, we shall find that
at the equator of the Earth these lines are directed into
the north and south hemispheres respectively upon op •
posite sides, while as we recede from the equator, the
opposite going lines drop more and more into the hemi-
sphere into which we are passing until when we reach
the latitudes of Cancer and Capricorn the forces and cur-
rents of air issuing from the base of the Tidal Circle are
directed toward the equator between the Cancer and
Capricorn calm zones, and towards the poles beyond
these zones.

108. — The rotation of the Earth by centrifugal force or
tangential tendency gathers the air in excess on the
equator. The tidal compress and orbital deflection forces
the excess of air from the equator into the Tidal Circle,
diminishing pressure at the equator and piling it up in
the calm zones of Cancer and Capricorn. To supply the
deficiency of pressure on the equator further air is drawn
from the geographical poles by the centrifugal force,
diminishing pressure on the poles. Thus from these
causes alone arises a barometrical depression of about
equal amount on the geographical equator and poles.
The Tidal poles are further denuded of air by the tidal
compress and orbital deflection, drawing air directly
from the Tidal Poles, thus arises the two barometrical
minimums of the atmosphere, on a circle of latitude in-
termediate between the poles of rotation and the poles
of the Tidal Circle.

109. — Thus we may say the rotation of the Earth by
centrifugal force or tangential tendency gathers the air
in excess on the equator. The tidal compress and or-
bital deflection, 19—24, forces the excess of air into the
Tidal Circle. These forces draw air directly from the
Tidal poles into the Tidal Circle. The orbital force de-
flects the excess and indraught into regions from which
the orbital force and compress is removed, thus giving
rise to the barometric pressure of the Tidal Circle and
the two barometrical maximums of the calm zones, that
of Cancer and Capricorn respectively, from which issue
the winds and currents of the atmosphere, flowing to the
corresponding barometric minimums of the poles.

110. — Thus the rotation of the Earth supplies air into
the equatorial regions of the Earth, the tidal compress
and orbital force, 19—21, supply air into the Tidal Circle,

27

and the orbital deflection by the tidal force, sets up the
barometrical pressure which returns air from the Tidal
Circle to the Tidal Poles and back to itself in the regions
of quadrature or tidal indraught, and so gives rise to the
winds and currents of the atmospheric circulation.

111. — The two barometrical minimums of the Earth,
in the north and south hemispheres respectively, are not
as already indicated; on the geographical poles, but on
the tidal poles on the circles of latitude which rotate
through the Tidal Poles, and which circles of latitude
may be denominated the Tidal Troughs of the atmo-
sphere.

112. — The tidal poles are 90° removed from the Tidal
Circle in the opposite tidal hemispheres, while the tidal
troughs of the air, the troughs of barometrical minimum,
are the circles of latitude rotating through the tidal poles,
and almost coincident with the Arctic Circles. On the
geographical poles themselves, if we could get there, we
should find the barometrical pressure to be greater than
on the arctic circles.

113. — Just as the tropics and calm zones of Cancer and
Capricorn take excess of air by rotating under the tidal
crests and Tidal Circle, 31 — 33, so the tidal trough circles
take a minimum of barometer by rotating under the
Tidal Poles.

114, — If the Sim were the only body producing tides,
the circles of barometrical minimum would be the arctic
circles, but the lunar orbit being inclined 50 to that of the
Sun, and the Moon being the dominant partner in produc-
ing the atmospheric tides and circulation, the tidal circles
are deflected proportionately, by a quantity of course
not exceeding 5°, the inclination of the ecliptic to the
lunar orbit, thus placing the circles of barometric mini-
mum approximately in the latitudeof the pole of the lunar
orbit.

115. — But consequent upon the rotation of the Earth
sharing in producing the tides as already indicated 108—
112, the geographical latitude of the Tidal Pole and trou gh,
and barometrical minimum, exceeds that of the arctic
circle, as appears from the following Table of barometric
averages deduced from observation. By Tidal Pole and
trough we here refer to that of the atmosphere, the
barometrical minimum of the Arctic Circle being a trough
of that movement of the atmosphere under orbital force
which piles the air in the Tidal Circle. The oceanic
Tidal Trough is along a meridian great circle of the Earth
at quadrature with that of the oceanic tidal crest$.

T A. B X,

South Latitude.

0° Ql
13° 0'
22° 17'
34° 48'

42°
45°

49I

54°
55°
60°
66°

53/

0»

8/

33/

26/

52/

O/

O/

74° O/

Average Height
of Barometer.

29.974
30.016
30.085
30.023
29.950
29.664
29.469
29.497
29.347
29.360
29.114
29.078
28.928

North Latitude.

0°
10°

20°
30*
40°
45°
50°
55o
60o
65°
70°
75°

Average Height
of Barometer.

29.853
30.002
30.004
30.069
30.006
30.011
29.943
29.960
29.835
29.623
29.722
29.863

The above Table, places the tidal trough of the atmo-
sphere and barometrical minimums in latitude about 69°
in the northern hemisphere, and 74° in the southern
hemisphere, and show that centrifugal force of the
Earth's rotation, tidal compress, and orbital force, have
a greater action on the southern hemisphere than on the
northern, the land of the northern hemisphere by friction
and impact impeding the tidal movement, and prevent-
ing its full development in this hemisphere, thus rela-
tively forcing the southern tidal trough and barometrical
minimum to higher latitudes than the northern.

117. — The same thing acts to tilt the tidal crest, or
calm zones of Cancer to higher latitudes than that of
Capricorn, and to throw the tidal equator into the north-
ern hemisphere into the circle of the doldrums.

118. — If the Earth were entirely covered by an ocean
of uniform depth, the tidal and barometrical effects would
be symetrieal in both geographical hemispheres, but
there are no deflections of effects but what can be easily
calculated.

119. — The tidal atmospheric trough about the arctic
circles varies in barometric pressure at differont periods
of the lunar month, the pressure being lowest at new
moon and full moon, and highest at the quadratures, and
the range of the oceanic tides may be regarded as a
measure of the variation. There is also an annual varia-
tion of pressure superposed on the lunar, but for prac-
tical purposes this is measured with the lunar, and the
range of the ocean tides becomes a measure of both solar
and lunar variations of barometric pressure about the
tidal trough of the arctic circles, When pressure in the

29

arctic circles is lowest, it is highest in the Tidal Circle
and calm zones of Cancer and Capricorn and vice versa.

120. — Thus when the oceanic tidal range is increasing
measured from highest to lowest level of the water, the
average barometer is falling in the polar regions and in-
creasing in the equatorial regions of the Earth, and con-
versely when the oceanic tidal range is decreasing, the
average barometer is rising in the polar regions, and fall-
ing in the equatorial regions. This semi lunar monthly
flow and ebb of the air towards and from the equator,
is accompanied by corresponding changes in average
temperature, and cold and warmth will alternate with
the lunar weeks or quarters.

121. — Thus the tidal range of the ocean waters which
can be measured on our own coasts, is a barometer in-
dicating the amount and distribution of average barome-
tric pressure over the calm zones of Cancer and Capri-
corn, and in the arctic circle of the geographical pole,
and roughly a measure of temperature the world over.
The directions of the variations can be predicted equally
with the tides, the amount can be approximated by cal-
culation equally with the height of the tides, but the
exact value can only be determined by observation.

122. — When the oceanic tides are highest, then,
when the barometer is highest in the calm zones of Cancer
and Capricorn; and lowest in the polar regions of the
Earth, then the atmospheric circulation is most energetic,
its winds and currents are most strong, and storm
centres and depressions are developed of the deepest
character, aud coming round on the various Sarseraws,
inflict the greatest damage on the various coasts. At
new and full moon, especially at the times of solar and
lunar eclipses, and when a very high oceanic tide pre-
vails, then let fishermen and sailors closely watch the
barometer, for storms at these times attain the greatest
vehemence and force, the atmospheric disturbance and
contrasts of pressure being greatest at these times,
though it must be ever remembered that the greatest
storms are manufactured near the tropics, and that there
is a time interval before they strike distant coasts, but
in their course they vary greatly in depth, and these
variations are greatest at new and full moon in every
region, and when barometical depressions are running-
deepest, and elevations are running highest, when the
barometer is rocking most, at new and full moon, the
weather is universally in its angriest mood, and storms
are then the most destructive, The Tay Bridge storm

so

preeminently Of this class, occurring on the day of a
lunar eclipse, and when the Sun and Moon were both in
high declination, and the Earth near perihelion rushing
almost at its fastest through space, and the air piling up
in the Tidal Circle almost to its greatest maximum, and
falling at the poles almost to its lowest minimum, then
it was that the atmosphere appeared to almost drop ver-
tically into the depression which passed over Britain
and rushed the Bridge over, the barometer fallng to a
very unusually low point immediately before the storm.
Other great storms have accompanied eclipses of both
the Sun and the Moon, so frequently and of such great
violence, as to indicate not merely coincidences, but a
close connection with the tidal effects of these positions
of our luminaries. And if further proof were required,
it is known that earthquakes are more frequent at the
conjunctions of the Sun and Moon than at other times,
and just as we assigned the oceanic tides to the atmos-
pheric movements, so it would appear that earthquakes
result from the great movements of the air giving rise to
the atmospheric circulation and oceanic tides, the tidal
movements of the air, which remove pressure from cer-
tain parts of the Earth's surface and crust, and pile it
up in other parts, and under the great inequalities of
pressure of the atmosphere and the variations, and under
the effort of particles of the solid Earth to obey the
orbital force which deflects the atmosphere and to move
in independent orbits about the Sun and Moon, we are
inclined to believe that even the surface of the solid
Earth heaves and throbs under the tidal forces of 19 —
24 and 54, but secondary to the movements of the atmo-
sphere.

123— Demonstrated §§ 1 to 122.

(A) Rotation of the Earth, its motion in space, and gravi-
tation of the Sun, Moon, and Earth, and their motions, act-
ing on the mobile atmosphere, these are the forces which
give rise to the atmospheric circulation and oceanic
tides, and (B) the circulation of the ocean, including the
tides, waves, and currents, is secondary to the atmo-
spheric and caused thereby. And when these principles
are recognised, then, and then only, shall we have a
science of meteorology worthy oi the name, and embrac-
ing all the movements of air, water, and the Earth's
crust, thus completing the connections between meteoro-
logy, seismology, and geology, and rendering these kin-
dred sciences subordinate to that of astronomy.

It

124. — If the demonstrations (A) and (B) 123 are re-
garded by the reader as not yet complete, and if the de-
monstrations against the thermal view of the atmospheric
circulation, and in favour of the orbital force gravita-
tional convection view of this treatise are so regarded,
then these shall be further demonstrated when dealing
with Precession of the Equinoxes and Nutation by aid of
diagrams.

125. — Before proceeding to the more important sub-
jects of Precession and Nutation, with the readers' con-
sent, we will have an interlude, giving off a few thoughts
of the writer, upon many important subjects, some of
which may be somewhat apart from the immediate pur-
pose of this treatine, on the basis that just as there is a
correlation of physical forces, so there is a correlation of
mental forces, and if the reader attaches any importance
to the matter of this treatise, it cannot be altogether un-
interesting to know what manner of man the writer may
be. And also in this interlude, we will give some of our
announcements which have appeared before in other
publications. Thus the interlude may be regarded as
" a peg to hang a hat upon," and some readers may feel
disposed to cut off the head that wears it, but for one
enemy we may raise, let us hope that we shall raise a
dozen friends, and then all will be well.

126. — In dealing with the question of the Atmospheric
Circulation Oceanic Tides, Precession, and Nutation, the
writer has found the laws of motion as given in the text
books almost inextricably confused, often erroneous, and
this even in Newton's Principia.

127. — It is not surprising that this shouldjbe so when
we find so much ignorance and confusion in almost every
department of life and action.

128. — Thus in fiscal matters, statesmen and legislators,
supported by a mass of deluded or indifferent followers,
make a charge for allowing treasure to come into a
country, when, if there must b3 a fine at all, it would be
more rational to inflict a fine upon those who are taking
it out. Purchase is barter in which gold is one of the
two or more substances exchanged, and it would be as
rational to tax a coin going into a country as to tax the
other substance of the exchange. To stop the exchange
in respect to either equivalent is to stop it in respect to
both, and if carried to its utmost limits would stop inter-
national trade entirely. Nations who impose prohibitory
tariffs rob the world's merchants of their markets, break
the Mosaic laws " Thou shalt not covet" what is thy

neighbours, "Thoushalt not steal" what is thy neigh-
bours, trample on the minority of themselves who think
justly upon these matters, and produce beggary and
poverty all round. With a world of an increasing popula-
tion to be clothed and fed these tariffs must go.

129. — Again, in politics and the domain of legislation
and morals, we find a system which derives its revenue
from vice, a system which leads to the imbibing of subtle
poisons such as alcohol and tobacco, both of which cor-
rupt the heart, take the fine edge off the nerves,
muscles, and brain, impair the blood, and lead to phy-
sical degeneracy, prematnre death, and national degra-
dation and decay, a system which requires for its main-
tenance 40,000 policemen, and inflicts upon the citizens
of Britain a still larger army of upwards of 200,000 pub
licans, the latter an army more detrimental and destruc-
tive to national life, than even an army of occupation
composad of foreigners could possibly be, a system whose
blood money is largely used to pay our soldiers to conduct
wars, which whether just or unjust, should not be sup-
ported in this way.

130. — Then in religious doctrine there is a system
which defers baptism too long, leaving many of God's
true children unbaptised to drift into the world, a system
making a God as it were of baptism, making it an end
instead of a means, and a still larger system, of which, if
it can be said it administers baptism at all, so trad-
uces and administers this sacrament as to nullify its
use altogether. Surely there is some via media which
could reconcile the difference of opinion on this matter.
" To the law and to the testimony, if they speak not ac-
cording to this, it is because there is no light in them."
Then in religious practice we see the alcoholic cup of
devils used on the tables of Christians, and what is more
horrid still, used at the Lord's table. And ministers and
laymen calm their consciences and expect God's blessing
on their labours. Thus we see the most holy and most
sacred things in doctrine and practice all confused by
the grossest ignorance, and centralization no cure for
the evils, but only making them worse,

131. — Millions may define a pope as infallible, but it
does not make the doctrine one whit more true than if
not held at all. And so with the laws of motion, how-
ever many high priests of science, and however many
persons who sit in the seats of learning, may declare a
view to be true, and however many learned societies
may countenance it, and even if supported by Govern-

ment money, it does not make the view one whit more
true, if it is contrary to the operations of nature, and the
results deducible from observation.

132. — Much that is assigned to the laws of motion,
including orbital motion of a globe in space about its
companion or primary, is only true in ratio and not in
absolute quantity; and much is false in both ratio and
quantity, hence the irrational tables of planetary den-
sities, and of the Sun itself, which at present prevail in
circles posing as authorities, and are imprinted in the
text books.

133. — No system of natural philosophy can be sound
which does not assign to the planets of the Solar System
and their matter physical characteristics resembling those
of the Earth., both in quality and density, and this is a
resemblance which must also extend to the Sun and Stars.

134. — The results based on the present tables of the
planets must be received with caution, for undoubtedly
these tables are false to fact, and any influence they
possess in correcting or approximating results of obser-
vation and measurement, is very likely to introduce
error into the latter.

135. — The absolute quantity of the fall arid accelera-
tion of a planet under gravity toward the primary is
greater than the quantity assigned by the Newtonian
philosophy, as is also the centrifugal tendency in the
orbit in the proportion of 11 : 7.

136. — The value of gravitation for the Earth's surface
may have been correctly deduced from pendulum obser-
vations, but even here no measure of the fall and accel-
aration produced by gravitation will be satisfactory until
it is deduced from the direct unimpeded fall of a body in
a vacuum which can easily be done by means of instant-
aneous photography or by electric contacts, or by both
combined. It is perhaps hopeless to expect to obtain
such an experiment except by an individual effort on my
own part ; for I have found most scientific men who are
in a position to aid in this matter, thick-headed and in-
capable of receiving either the highest intuitions or
to understand the simplest proofs, unless backed by
some incoherent unintelligible formulae, which assumes
quantities which have no existence, such as regarding
an infinitely small quantity as nothing, an infinitely
short curved line as straight, and similar absurdities and
begging of the question. Manifestly if an infinitely
small quantity of matter is nothing, an infinite number
of small quantities is nothing, and so the universe of

matter would have no existence. Similarly if an infin-
itely small portion of a curve is a straight line, an in-
finite number of such curves placed end to end must be
a straight line, and the ellipse and circle could have no
existence. Then on deducing the path of a projectile or
of a planet parallelograms of motion or force are drawn
having straight sides and diagonals, whereas in point of
fact at no moment can the velocities be so represented.
The proper measure of the movement of a planet is the
amount of momentum conferred or removed in a given
time, the centripetal force acting on a planet being sim-
ultaneously engaged conferring tangential momentum
and destroying it, and in such a way that the orbital
motion of a planet may be regarded as conferred by
gravity not simply by a primary impulse, but such that
in every quarter-revolution the force of gravity has both
conferred and destroyed a momentum equal to the tan-
gential momentum, so that if Muz the tangential mo-
mentum in the orbit. 2 Mzz the force of gravity in the
time of a quarter revolution,and if Rizz the radius then ^
B equals the velocity destroyed and^ R that conferred in
a quarter revolution, and the sum f- R is the total value in
momentum in the time of a quarter revolution, and -^ R is
the value of the space or fall towards the primary in the
time of a quarter revolution. And this value agrees
with the motion of a planet as deduced by the writer
from that of a pendulnm compared with that of a planet
in its orbit, and by geometrical and mathematical de-
monstrations which may be given later on in this treatise.
137. — Sir Isaac Newton was a dawning light.
138. — The Principia however is a little nebulous.
139. — We must have a brighter illumination than that
of the Principia, and get back more and more to the
Keplerian intuitions, and endeavour to bring these into
adjustment with observation, and to place them on a
strictly scientific and accurate basis.

140.— Cor. 20, Prop. 66, book 1, of the Principia though
based on a true movement of the isolated detached
Moon is altogether falsely conceived, it begs the question,
is not contained in the preamble to the proposition or
theorem and is absurd, which shall be demonstrated
later on by the writer in this treatise.

141. — With all respect to the memory of Newton, doubt-
less there are other errors in the "Principia, and that
this is so is quite manifest by the various absurdities of
modern planetary tables, based on the Newtonian phil-
osophy, such as that which assigns to Saturn a density

3'

less than that of water, whereas this planet is evidently a
consolidated globe like our Earth, and in a similar stage
of development, and therefore likely to resemble the
latter in density.

142. — But before giving further considerations regard-
ing these matters, let us embody one of the stepping
stones to right conceptions, by reprinting our Nineteenth
Century and Victorian Announcements as these ap-
peared in the Dundee Weekly News of Dec. 24th, 1898,
and the Dundee Evening Telegraph of Dec. 25, 1899
respectively.
JOHN JONES'S VICTORIAN ANNOUNCEMENTS.

(From the Dundee Evening Telegraph, of Dec. 25, 1899.)

Last Christmas I announced that gravitation was a
central force, increasing to the centre of the Earth by
the law of inverse squares — i.e., half the distance from
the centre, four times the force, one third the distance,
nine times the force, and so on. A surface, a thing of
length and breadth, but no thickness, can have no force,
and gravitation must necessarily reside in the mass, and
in this respect we have no reason to suppose that large
masses like the Earth will differ from small masses like
the molecule. Besides magnetism is the analogy with
gravitation, and it is a force increasing to the centre of
the magnet. I have now to announce another law — viz.,
that fo> a homogenous sphere of given volume the force of
gravity varies as the density squared — i.e., half the density,
one fourth the force, one third the density, one ninth the
force, three times the density, nine times the force, and
so on. This arises from density being the expression of
distance between the particles whose mutual influence
varies as the inverse square of their distances. We are
now to furnish a table of rational masses and densities
for the sun, moon, and planets, which, it may be pre-
sumed, are not likely to differ greatly in density from
each other and the earth, and in every case must greatly
exceed the density of water. We shall place the old
tables side by side with the new. An influence of the
sun increases the gravitation of the planets in a way de-
pendent on distance, so that those near the sun have
their force increased more than those more remote, an i
thus appear to be more dense than the latter. When the
required correction is made for this influence it will be
found that the different members of the solar system
differ still less in density than heretofore supposed.
Table 2 is given without this correction, which may be
given on a future occasion.

36

Sun,

Moon,

Mercury,

Venus,

Earth,

Mars,

Jupiter,

Saturn,

Uranus,

Distance

from
Sun in Miles

0

91,430,000
85,393,000
66,181,000
91,430,000
139,312,000
475,693,000
872,135,000
1,753,851,000

Neptune, 2,746,271,000

Diameter

in

Miles
853,737
2,160
3,010
7,707
7,927
4,247
86,520
79,930
31 900
34,'700

Volume Mass Density

Earth's Earth's Eaith's

being Unity being Unity being Unity

1250000.000 315000000

TABLE I.— Irrational— Based on the Newtonian Theory of Gravity which regards the
Earth's Force of Gravity as Diminishing to Nothing at the Centre.

Density
Wate?

being Unity
1-444
3 -207
6-860
4-810
5650
4-170
1-378
•750
1-280
1-150

•020
•055
•919
1-000
•154

1301-000
716-400
65-170
85-8SO

•Oil
066
•778
1-000
•112
315-400
94400
14-000
17-050

•544
1-210
•850
1 -000
•737
•244
•132
•226
•204

TABLE 2.— Rational.— Based on Theory of Gravity under consideration, in which the
Force of Gravity increases to the Earth's Centre, hy the law of inverse squares, and
varies in a Mass as the Density squared.

Distance Diameter

Volume

Mass

Density Density

from

in

Earth's

Earth's

Earth's Water

Sun in Miles

Miles

being Unity

being Unity

being Unity bein

f Unity

Sun

0

853,737

1250000-000

627 500

502

•284

Moon,

91,430,000

2,160

•020

•015

•748

4235

Mercury

, 35,398,000

3,010

•055

•060

1-098

6'215

Venus,

66,131,000

7,707

•919

•846

•920

5-203

Earth,

91,430,000

7,927

1-000

1000

1-000

5-660

Mars,

189,312,000

4,247

•154

•131

•853

4-830

Jupiter,

475.693,000

86,520

1301-000

640-000

•493

2-790

Saturn,

872,135,000

70,930

716-400

260.100

•363

2-050

Uranus,

1,753,851,000

31,900

65-170

30-870

•470

2-680

Neptune

, 2,746,271,000

34,700

83-080

37820

•450

2550

It will be observed that the irrationalities of the first
table are in the last three colnmns. In these tables I have
taken the Earth as 5*66 denser than water, the unit us-
ually adopted by the Newtonian school of Philosophy.
By that Philosophy,Saturn, a globe similar to our Earth,
is much lighter than water, which is absurd. Saturn is
a Cooled- Down World, and is just now passing through its
glacial period, and to regard it as lighter than water in
this stage is most illogical, and contrary to all physical
analogies. Saturn as a Solid Globe resembling our
Earth, must be at least two or three times denser than
water,- while the Earth is probably denser than 5.66. The
Newtonian table gives Saturn as only three-fourths the
density of water , and theSun as only 1 '41 that of water .Were
it not that the Sun is a multiple body, with the constit-
uent bodies not filling the whole of the space occupied,
it would be the most dense body of the Solar System,
and for the most part, and in respect to its solid portions
it must be regarded as such.

In our last we announced that the Sun was a Dynamo,
consisting of what might be regarded as a dual or triple
world, possibly quadruple, in which the two central
bodies forming the major portion of the Sun were
in a state of oscillation, moving about each other in

37

what appears to be a rectilineal orbit, the orbital period
being I'l second of time, the one body playing the part of
armatures, and the other of field magnets, (though either
may be regarded as armatures, and either as field mag-
nets, since both possess equal momentums), and thus
developing by induction positive and negative electricity,
with their currents and discharge, and other products of
electrolysis as oxygen and hydrogen, and thus giving
rise to the solar light and heat. The main portion of the
Sun is cool and solid, and the outer solid globe or body
possesses, for the most part, a cool surface, com-
patible with being the abode of life. There are vast
regions of the Sun at the base of the solar atmosphere
in which the surface of the globe is so hot that life is ab-
solutely impossible, yet for the most part in regions at
the base but removed from the line of the central orbital
oscillation, the conditions of temperature are compatible
with life. We cannot boil a kettle of water with the fire
only on the top and a circulation of air around,and theSun's
solid surface cannot be hot with the electric discharge
and development of heat occurring only in the line of the
oscillation, and in the photosphere above the atmosphere,
with expansions of cold electrolytic vapours pouring into
the latter from the underlying surface. Over the im-
mediate line of oscillation of the central bodies of the Sun
there will be regions of heat covering vast areas, in
wrhich the conditions for life are entirely absent. In con-
sidering the oscillations, the masses and momentums are
so great that all distinctions of solid, liquid,and gas,prac-
tically disappear. The central solid globe or nucleus can
oscillate in the onter enclosing solid globe as easily as if
oscillating in a liquid or g:as, probably easier. The exact
form of the two oscillating bodies is a subject for calcu-
lation; they must not be regarded as twro spherical
globes, although the external of the two will approximate
to a spherical form at the Poles. All the stars are dynamos.
I also announced that the twinkling of stars was due
to interference in the stellar light, arising from magnetic
double refraction of the light in transit through the
Earth's atmosphere. Each original pencil of light com-
ing from the star is broken up in our atmosphere into
two pairs of circular rays, right and left-handed, whose
resultant is two plane rays differing in phase according
to the path pursued through the atmosphere and the
amount and direction of magnetization, which latter is
an ever-changing quantity, changing from moment to mo-
meut. In each pair of rays the lower ray encounters a denser

38

a'mosphere than the upper, hence the retardation giving rise to
the interference and scintillation. Superposition of the in-
terfering rays results from there being two magnetiza-
tions— negative and positive — possessing two distinctive re-
fractive and dispersive indices. Stellar scintillation is al-
sent in the equatorial regions of the Earth, because there , magnetic
polarity is absent, aud consequently magnetization and double re-
fraction of the light is alsent.

I have now to announce a few facts regarding the Moon.

There is not a single volcanic crater in the Moon, and volcanos are
conspicuous ly their absence. The Structures on the Moon
are so marvellously intact over the entire surface as to
show that they have not been subjected to any such up-
heaving and destructive force as the volcano. Great heat
evaporates ; lesser heat melts and levels do\rn ; moderate
heat, accompanying cooling, throws down as fast as it
builds up,iri respect to structural characteristics; and no de-
velopment of heat in a world can build wall-like structures
such as those of the Moon. One great earthquake, such
as accompanies volcanic action, would throw7 them down,
and volcanic action and earthquake over all the surface
would throw them all down. There have been no vol-
canoes nor earthquakes in the Moon during the period
when the present lunar structures were built. These
structures are the work of animals, i.e., the coral reef
builders, they are attolic structures, which can only be
formed where volcanoes are absent. The former presence
of an ocean over the entire surface of the Moon has pre-
served the lunar structures wonderfully intact and free
from atmospheric denudation, unless we except the older
formations and a comparatively recent denudation by
glacial action. The lunar structures are of calcium mat-
ter, carbonate and selenium or gypsum for the most part,
and only resemble volcanoes and craters to lesser extent
than that which prevails between the coral structures
and volcanoes of the Earth. Owing to the entire ab-
sence of volcanoes and upheaving forces in the Moon its
coral structures are more typical and true in character
than those of the Earth ; but, except with respect to de-
nudation and modification by crystallisation, in no other
respect do they differ from the latter. Whitsunday Is-
land in the Pacific Ocean is perhaps the most typical
coral island of our Earth ; it resembles a volcanic crater,
but in no respect is to be regarded as such, and Whit-
sunday Island resembles in form the most typical coral
structures of the Moon. But Whitsunday Island is pro-
bably built on upheaved ground, while in the Moon the

39

cbral structures rest on old sea beds, mostly plane or de-
pressed, so that the lunar structures are less like a vol-
cano or crater than Whitsunday Island. There are no
chains of mountains in the Moon, such as are character-
istic of volcanoes, but a grouping of the structures in a
manner resembling that of the coral islands of the Indian

and Pacific Oceans. In the last stages of the Mocn, as the at-
mosphere in disappearing became rarefied, bringing in the cold of
space, glacial conditions prevailed over the entire lunar surface,
producing the boulder and stone morraines constituting the streaTcs
which radiate out from Tycho, (Copernicus, Kepler, and other
otollic lasins of the Moon. Glacial action may have formed
some of the Rilles, but most of these are due to water
action percolating through a calearecus soil, and are can-
ons such as those of Colorado, and similarly formed.

The great prophet and leader MOSES asserted that
Adam was the first man. Geologists have traced man
into the glacial period of the Earth, but no further ; and,
for the most part, regard the glacial period as having
come to an end 200,000 years ago, asserting that man
was upon the Earth at that time, thus denying the
Mosaic record. Moses also asserted that, in the time of
Noah, there had been an universal flood. Geologists, for
the most part deny the latter, though since I first pub-
lished my views on the Flood some have come round to
a better mind. I have to repeat that the Glacial Period
terminated with the flood of Noah, that the flood of Noah
was universal, and that the approach to the Earth of the
waters which caused the flood was the cause of the
glacial period. The waters previous to the Flood lay
above the firmament around the Earth, as rings or belts
resembling those of the planet Saturn. These entered
the Earth gradually before the Flood, bringing in the
cold of space, producing a mist, which hid the Sun, and
dropping as snow, piled up the ice on the higher lati-
tudes of the Earth, and so caused the Glacial Period.
Thus the antiquity of man is unproved, and the Mosaic
record stands out triumphant. During the glacial period
the mist was so great as to hide the Sun and prevent
the formation of a rainbow. The fall of the rings upon
the Earth to produce the Flood cleared away the mist,
opened the windows and clouds of Heaven to the direct
Sun, and thus the bow upon the cloud, seen by Noah
and his friends for the first time, and the proof that no
more waters enveloped the Earth, in space, became the
guarantee that 110 more Flood should cover the Earth.
It was the voice of God in nature, " I do set my bow iu

40

the cloud," &c. Thus again the Mosaic record prevails.

Permit me to announce that the tides of the ocean are
an effect of the Sun and Moon upon our atmosphere,
producing barometrical changes commensurate with the
effect, and not a direct effect upon the waters of the
ocean, such as heretofore supposed. The waters are
compressed out of the regions of high barometer, and
rise into those of low, flowing away to form the tidal
waves. From KEPLER'S Laws it can be shown that the
particles of the atmosphere next the Moon and Sun, like
so many satellites, endeavour to describe elliptical orbits
smaller than that described by the Earth round the con-
trolling centres of gravity, and to move faster therein ;
hence they become piled up in advance of the Earth in
the quadrant of low tide, creating a high barometer;
which presses out the waters of the ocean. From the
quadrant in advance of the Sun the atmosphere is ab-
stracted, the result being low barometer and high tide.
On the side of the Earth removed from the Sun and
Moon the atmosphere is piled up in the region of low tide
by an endeavour to pursue an enlarged elliptical orbit,
hence results as before a quadrant of high and low barome-
ter giving low and high tide. In short, there, are at all times
on the Earth two regions or quadrants of low Barometer, aud two of
high barometer, with two corresponding high tides and two low tides.
However much the barometer may vary locally, that is
the average and general law of the barometrical changes,
the ocean is our barometer, the tides are its movements, and
measure the average barometrical changes due to the
direct action of lunar and solar gravitation. Trade winds
and storms are dependent upon this law, the greatest
winds and storms accompanying the greatest tides. The
temperature of the Sun is related to tides and winds
principally by expanding the atmosphere, thus giving
rise to the differential gravitational action resulting in
the barometrical variations, tides, trade winds, and gulf
streams. To the great atmospheric movement deducible from*
Kepler'' s tliree great laws, and now detected in barometrical obser-
vations, we must assign the tides, trade winds, stoums and gulf
stream, and the gravitation of the Moon and Sun must be
regarded as acting to produce the various movements
and currents of the terrestrial atmosphere and ocean,
more directly than the Sun's heat.

Time and space will not permit me to dwell upon the
matter, but I beg to announce that gravitation is due to
the gyrations of ether and matter. The molecules of
ether and matter impinging against each other lose gy-

41

ratory motion, leaving an excess of motion in the approaching
sides of the gyroscopes, which forces the impinging bodies together.
The volume of the ether when subjected to pressure obeys the law of
gases, viz., the density is proportionate to the pressure. Hence the
ether density in a globe rises with the mass, and the for oe of gravi-
tation rises with the ether density. Let F be the force of

gravity at the centre of a globe, M the volume, D the
density of the matter, then

F=MD2

or if we take a uniform density for the matter, then F
is proportionate to the mass.

The sun contributes a considerable share of terrestrial
gravity, and deflects the centre to the side of the earth
next himself. The waters of the ocean endeavour to
flow round the deflected centre of gravity, and the solid
earth falls towards it, and at 12 o'clock noon and 12
o'clock midnight this deflection has raised the waters
of the ocean. This action is so marked in the Pacific
Ocean in the South Sea Islands, and the fact is so well
established, that the word for high water and midnight
is the same. Gravitation may be regarded as directed to every
point of space with a force proportionate to the density of the ether
at that point. The density of the ether at any point of
space is determined by the contiguity or distance of
matter from that point.

Space is filled with lines of force set up by the im-
pacts of matter and ether. These lines of force may be
regarded as radiating from the centre of a mass with a
force proportionate to the mass into the density squared.

The value of gravity at every point of the Universe is
determined by the entire matter of the Universe, and
every molecule and mass contributes a share to that of
every other, according to mass and distance. In the
equations of the Planets their intrinsic variations of
gravity must be taken into account, dependant on the
approach and recession of external bodies. This action
may be compared with induction. That point of the
Universe which is nearest the mass of the Universe is
not only the centre of gravity of the Universe, but the

point of greatest force of gravity. This point is liot necessarily

situated in a mass of ponderable matter, but may be situ-
ated in open spaco. The density of the ether is greatest
at that point, and galaxies of stars, and the motions of
the whole universe are controlled from that point.
Galaxies and individual stars may move through, iieav,
ani around it, pursuing almost rectilineal paths, at cor
tain distances; with an intense and almost uniform veio-

41

city over an immense length of path, without being re-
garded as runaways, or they may circle in elliptical or-
bits around it, just as though there was another orb
situated at that point. Sidereal systems and galaxies of
stars widely separated may have within themselves such
points of central force, resembling the central point of
the universe. Many stars which appear to be circling
around a dark invisible companion, may in reality be
circling around such centres of force of gravity in free
space. These stars may reveal where such controlling
points of gravity are situated, and thus reveal the pivots
of the galaxies and systems and perhaps that of the uni-
verse itself. The ether of space must be regarded as
the source of gravity, and the great controller, gathered
round, enfolding and controlling the ponderable matter
of the universe, though of course the actions and reac-
tions between the ether and matter are equal. The ac-
tions and reactions may be compared with electro-mag-
netic and magnetic induction.

For other results of J. JONES'S researches see his books
" The Sun a Magnet," " Undulation of the Sun's Nu-
cleus," " New Selenography," and "Tria Juncta in Una,"
entered at Stationers' Hall, and deposited in the princi-
pal libraries of the United Kingdom. But since there are
so many disputes as to who discovered certain things,
or who wrote certain books, e.g., whether Shakespeare
or Bacon wrote certain plays ; from which we will quote,
because foreshadowing gravitation —

" Time, force, and death
Do to this body what extremes they can,
But the strong base and building of my love
Is as the very centre of the earth
Drawing all things to it ."

Since the above is so, and there are so many JOHN
JONES'S, I beg to state and to place on record that your
humble servant the Author of the above books and these
announcements, first saw the light in a cottage which
stood on the abutments of the famous iron bridge in
Benthall, Broseley, Shropshire, on 5th February, 1851,
and is the son of the late WILLIAM JONES, son of RICHARD
and HANNAH JONES, son of WILLIAM and MARTHA JONES,
of Orchard House — all of Broseley, and of MARIA PALIN
JONES, his wife, daughter of JOHH PALIN and MARY
FURBER PALIN of Sheriffhales, son of THOMAS PALIN and
SARAH ADDISON PALIN, of Kinnersley, Shropshire — all of
honoured and revered memory. Wishing all friends a
" Merry Christinas and a Happy New Year,"

JOHN JONES, Natural Philosopher.
197 Princes Street, Dundee, Christmas, 1899.

m w , Errata to Tables on Page 36. Bead for Sun,
laoJe 1, Irrational — Newtonian.

.

bein|5f ty"

Table 2, Rational, based on Theory of Gravity under
consideration.

Sun'i Mass, Earth's Sun's Density, Earth's Sun's Density

unity. vater ££

^ These are the figures clearly shown as they appeared
m the original announcement in the Dundee Evenin°-
lelegraph from which page the above is copied, but not
very clearly shown in the copy on page 36.
For Saturn's diameter, Table I, read 70930 miles.

The following is from the Weekly News of
Dec. 24th, 1898, imprinted with the original plate.

JOHN JONES'S

NINETEENTH CENTURY
ANNOUNCEMENT.

GRAVITATION is due to a condition of tha
ether of epace about matter. In a homogeneous
globe that condition is greatest not at the surface, but at the
o- -litre. This holds for terrestrial gravity. The l-*w of in-
crease of a* trad ion which prevails as the earth is •jnrOftrtM'd
from without its surface, is continued all thficay to the centre.
That law is the law of inverse squares. Th* cohesion 01 i In
globe and the unity ot the system demand this law, and
pendulum olmtrculiuna coiiji'nu, it.

The sun is a multiple body or star, that is, multiple wi' hin
it« visible surface, and of which the central component is a
1'i-fT^ m:u'i;eti« globe moving in an orbit about the centre of
graviiy of the solar mass in an ort>i al perirxl of I'l secou-J «>f
time. 01, that is, 54 complete revolutions or osc Hat ions per
minute. The orbital movements of the bodies within ilia
KIIII are the source of the sun's light and ht.-at. That of its
central magnetic globe is the principal source. Tbe-s
movements are accompanied by intense elw.io-
magnetic induction calling into existence the s-'iar
atmof-phere and the solar energies of radia'ion.
The everlasting orbital movements of the maU'ri:il
bodies of the universe are the source of the everlasting
radiations of th»» universe, the manner of operation tx'inu
that of celestial approaches and collisions, these approaches
being accaapanfed by electro-iniiguelic induction and the
giving oflf of IJKht and heat, and the collisions by a re-
crea'ion of the system, with a sun or star for the centre.
Kv«ry visible star in the heavens— planet* exeepted— is a
mu'tiple star similar to the sun, that is, consists of several
bodies within its own visible surface possessed of di-tin«-t
ort»i;al movements; and the source of the star's radiation is
the internal orbiUl movements of its component masses or
globes.

Stellar scintillation is due to atmospheric double r»
fraction, produced by magnetism of the star's light as it
impinges on and transmits the atmosphere at a refracting
angle, the magnetisation being by two mediums of our
atmosphere, negative and positive, possessing differ>-nc
rotative and dispersive powers, ana since the dispersions .;n 1
double refractions of the two mediums are of opposite dir-i -
tiona and different values, larce portions of the spect'-"ru
colours of the star are superposed in interference phase Tli^
intensity of terrestrial magnetism along the path of the star •
lipht is varying every moment, and the character of the
scintillation varies with it. The double refractions by
terrestrial magnetism resemble those produced by prisms of
right and left handed quartz.

J. JONES. Natural Philosopher.
197 PRINCKS STREET,
'

PRECESSION OF THE EQUINOXES.

143. — To enable an ordinary reader to take a simple
view of precession of the Equinoxes. letN C S, Fig. 6 be
the geographical axis of the Earth, N the North Pole,
S the South Pole, W D E V the Equator, O the Earth's
centre, P C A an axis of the Earth parallel to that of the
ecliptic axis, that is to say, parallel to the axis of the
Earth's orbit round the Sun, then precession of the
Equinoxes consists of a rotation of the Earth on the axis
PGA effected in 25000 years in the direction L D K V
as shown by the arrows, and which rotation may be de-
denominated a processional day. This rotatation of the
Earth in 25000 years alters the aspect of the heavens ex-
actly the same as if the heavens rotated round the Earth
in the contrary direction to the processional rotation of
the Earth, in this period of 25000 years, and which rela-
tively they do.

Fig.l. — Precessional, Tidal, & Secular Retardation force,

NUTATION.

144. — The plane of precessional rotation LDKV is
subject to a slight change from time to time, as is also
the velocity of the precessional rotation, the changes
being recurrent and synchronous in the lunar period of
19 years, and the changes of place and change of vel-
ocity combined result in a slight change of the angle
X C P, or which is the same thing L C E, these two
angles being equal and varying together, a change over-
lapping or superposed upon the general precessiou of
25000 years. This movement is called Nutation, and
affects the position of the Sun and stars only slightly in
celestial latitude and longitude, i.e. only through a few
seconds of arc.

PRECESSION AND NOTATION.

145. — Taken together Precession of the Equinoxes or
movements of the nodal positions D and V (Fig. 6)
where the Earth's equator WDEV cuts the ecliptic plane
LDKV, and Nutation or nodding of the Earth's axis
varying the angle N C P, or that is angle S O A, for these
angles are equal and vary together, may be regarded as
one phenomenon caused by the combined action of the
Sun and Moon, both of which by their gravitation on
the particles of the Earth's atmosphere, are engaged
producing Precession, and both of which by their gravi-
tation on the protuberant matter of the Earth's equa-
torial and tropical regions, (a protuberance which may
be variable and related to tidal compress of the solid
Earth and atmospheric and oceanic piling of air and
water under the tidal forces, orbital, and centrifugal to
the Earth's diurnal rotation) are engaged producing
Nutation, just as both are engaged producing the tides
of the ocean, which oceanic tides are really due to the
forces which produce Precession and Nutation,
and in reality are the reaction of the ocean waters from
the Precessional movement and Nutation o! the solid
Earth, the recoil of the atmosphere from tne Precessional
impact, and its inertia in respect to the movement of the
solid Earth in Nutation, urging the ocean into its tides.

146. — But consequent upon the diurnal rotation of the
Earth, that of the solar day of 24 hours in the direction
WDEV not shown by arrows in Fig. 6, though shown
by arrows in Fig. 2, it follows that Precession and Nuta-
tion, are not quite so easily understood and their prin-
ciples embraced as 144 and 145 and Fig. 6 would lead
the reader to suppose. And in dealing with these mat-

46

ters which are such as have baffled the combined wisdom
of the world since the creation to the present moment,
including all the ancient astronomers, and the greatest
of minds and intellects of more modern times, embracing
names such as those oi Copernicus, Galileo, Kepler,
Newton, Adams, we say, that in dealing with these deep
matters, we ask the forbearance of our readers, and their
patient consideration, and ask them to suspend their
judgment upon the points involved, until they grasp the
general expression of what we have to say, and not even
then to suppose that we have said all that we know upon
the subjects. Let it suffice,that,if in the general elucidation
we shall have been enabled to indicate and place upon the
proper basis, the broad general facts and principles of
the Atmospheric Circulation, Oceanic Tides, Precession
of the Equinoxes, Nutation of the Earth's Axis, and the
Secular Retardation of the Earth's diurnal rotation,
principles fraught with consequences to the inhabitants
of the world only secondary (if they are secondary) to
those which the annunciation of the Copernican system
involved, the system which asserted that the Earth
went round the Sun, in contradistinction to previously
conceived notions and received opinions of both the
learned and unlearned.

147. — But to proceed. If we regard the Precessional
rotation, the rotation of the Earth effected in a preces-
sional day of 25000 years on the axis P C A Fig 6, in the
direction L D K V as being due to a rush of the matter
of the atmosphere en masse round the Earth in the direc-
tion L D K V, round circles of celestial latitude on the
Earth parallel to L D K V, and with a momentum and
velocity proportionate to the magnitude of these circles,
but with a resultant along the great circle L D K V, and
to such which rush the precessional rotation is evidently
due, then this rush is taking place over the Earth as the
latter rotates in the direction W D E V in the solar day
of 24 hours, which diurnal rotation is almost directly op-
posed to the rush of the atmosphere which gives rise to
the rotation constituting the Precessional day, hence
ensue modifications and complications which have to be
considered.

148. — Up to this point in dealing with precession; Fig. 6
will suffice for illustration, but we must now pass to
Fig. 2 correspondingly lettered to Fig. 6 in respect to the
same parts, (a method pursued as far as possible for all
the figures,) but drawn aud lettered to embrace much
jnpre of the phenomena, and requiring all the letters pf

the alphabet to indicate its various functions, and enable
it to be used for elucidating the subjects. This figure
may be regarded as the alphabet or ABC of the sub-
jects treated, and as an ordinary alphabet is capable of
universal adaptation for descriptive purposes, so it is
hoped that this figure may provide very extensive appli-
cations in illustration of the subjects treated.

FIG. 2.

N S the Geographical axis, N the North Pole,S the South Pole, W D E V,
the terrestrial Equator rotating from west to east, P A the axis of Precession,
B J G or that is L D K V the direction of the Precessional rotation on the
Ecliptic axis T C A, PGA the Edipt'c axis, K D L V the plane of the Eclip-
tic circle, N T/l the path of the North Pole in the Preoessional rotation,
S T/U the path of the South Pole in the Preceasion.

149.— As before in Fig. 6, so in Fig. 2, N C S is the
geographical polar axis, G the Earth's centre, WD E V
the terrestrial equator PA the ecliptic axis of the
Earth, K D L V a great circle of the Earth in the ecliptic
plane or plane of the Earth's path round the Sun, or re-
latively of the Sun's motion round the Earth, but B C F
and G C H are two axes of the Earth, parallel to two
positions of the axis of the lunar orbit removed half a

lunar period or synodical revolution, or about 9| years
apart or to be exact 3397 days apart, or that is parallel
to the axis of the Moon's orbit about the Earth or
Earth's orbit about the Moon, or that is, parallel to the
axis of the orbits of both bodies about their common
centre of gravity. COM and Q C R indicate great circles
of the Earth in the plane of the orbit of the Moon and Earth
for the two positions of the axis B C F and GGH respec-
tively. NT/I parallel to BJG is the circle of Precession
of the Earth's north pole, the circle S U to which S T
is tangent that for the south pole, and these circles of
Precession of the poles are described by the poles, in the
Precessional rotation or day of 25000 years, on the eclip-
tic axis of the Earth PGA, the direction of the Pre-
cessional rotation or movement being indicated by the
arrows N T/I and S T/U, parallel to the ecliptic circle
L D K V, the polar axis N C S describing the two cones
N G I and S G U of which the circles of celestial latitude
N T/I and S T/U parallel to the ecliptic plane are the base
respectively, and the Earth's centre G the apex, in the
period of 25000 years, as the Earth is rotated round the
ecliptic axis PGA. Except for the comparatively slight
nutation of the Earth's polar axis N G S, the latter is
always directed rectilinearly along the face of these two
cones N G I and S GU as the Earth rotates in the Pre-
cessional day or rotation of 25000 years, on the ecliptic
axis PGA and which rotation constitutes the pheno-
menon of Precession. Consequent upon the Nutation or
nodding of the Earth's polar or geographical axis N G S,
superposed upon the Precessional rotation on the axis
PGA in the direction LDKV or that is NT'I, the
circles N T'l and S T'U are slightly waved, due to the
variation of the angle N C P or that is S G A now in-
creasing now decreasing, according as the tangent K T
is directed inwards or outwards of the circle NT/I,
a condition dependent upon the position of the pole of
the lunar orbit in the circle B J G, and the plane of the
lunar orbit in the circles B D Q V and M I) O V about
the ecliptic, the tangent N T being directed inwards
when the pole of the lunar orbit is at B and outwards
when the pole of the lunar orbit is at G, as the axis of the
lunar orbifc B G F or G 0 H revolves round the ecliptic
axis PGA, in a synodical revolution of the Moon of about
19 years or to be exact 6793 days, the angle B G P or
G C P equal to L G M or R C L being about 5|°, and this
being the inclination of the plane of the lunar orbit
M C O or Q C R to that of the ecliptic and so of the lunar

40

tidal circle MDOV or RDQV to the solar tidal circle
LDKV and circle of lunar precessional force RDQV
or MDOV the latter shown in two positions at inter-
vals about 9 years apart, the ecliptic plane bisecting the
two positions making angles of 5^°and so near to them, that
approximately it may be regarded as the precessional
circle or Tidal Circle to both Sun and Moon, but the
angle N O P or that is S C A varies only over a few
seconds of arc, the extreme limits of the variation by
Nutation being less than 19//, and the period of Nutation,
that of the synodic revolution of the Moon, comprehend-
ing all subsidiary oscillations and variations; a return to
the original inclination of the ecliptic axis and equator
being effected in each synodic revolution of the Moon of
19 years or to be exact 6793 days; except for a slight
relative diminution in the force of Precession which
causes the obliquity of the ecliptic to slowly decrease
by about S'l in 19 years by the relative increase
of the force of Nutation of the Sun and Moon
on the protuberant equator. But in point of f^ct
there are several minor nutations in each lunar month,
and annual nutations connected with the changing po-
sition of the Sun in the course of the year, the smallest
of which are important in relation to tides and weather.
When it is remembered that Nutation as with Precession
is a movement of rotation of the entire globe generated
on a momentary axis in which the radii are evanescent,
it is evident that the forces involved, are of great
magnitude. The smallest manifestations of a force
which visibly moves the entire solid globe is one deserv-
ing the greatest attention, and fraught with important
consequences in meteorology and kindred sciences.

150. — The force which effects Precessional rotation in
respect to the Sun is a force directed round the ecliptic
circle LDKV of the Earth, in the direction shown by
the arrows on this circle, and is due to the orbital force
of 19 — 24, 54, the force illustrated in Fig. 1, represented
by the velocity P E— P D or A C, and A C or F L— F G
This force may be regarded, in presence of the
Earth's diurnal rotation, as having two rectangular
resultants in two rectangular planes the one resul-
tant NDSV, Fig. 2, directed round a meridian
great circle of the Earth as shown by the arrows
on NDSV, and passing through the geographical
poles N and S, the other resultants directed round
the Earth in the plane of the terrestrial equator, in a
direction E D W V that is, due east to west, in a direction

50

that of the Secular Retardation of the Earth's rotation,
a retardation which, there is reason to believe, accom-
panies the observed secular change of the advance of the
Moon in its orbit or longitude. In the figure the two
components of the force L D K V are shown by the pair
of arrowed arcs over the sines L X and Z K, and the
pair arrowed arcs over the cosines L W and Y K respec-
tively, the sines being proportionate to their arcs, repre-
senting the components of the one resultant, the cosines
the components of the other resultant, and these sines
and cosines may be taken as expanded to represent
circles in their own planes, returning arrowed in reverse
direction with respect tospace, and north and south on the
other side of the figure, though in the same direction
with respect to east and west, so as to represent a tan-
gential impact or rotation of which the great circles
N D S V supposed to be arrowed continuously round the
sides of the figure in the directions named and indicated
by this sequence of the letters, are the respective re-
sultants. It ife not convenient to arrow the direction
EDWV for the Secular Retardation that is from east
to west, because this circle of the equator is arrowed in
the opposite direction W D E V to represent the diurnal
rotation, but the cosines L W and Y K or their arcs re-
garded as portions of circles on the side next the observer
of the figure, are arrowed to show the force EDWV
which produces the secular retardation. It may be more
convenient to regard L X, Z K, L W, Y K, as radii to
circles in their own planes, which circles may then be
taken to represent the forces N D S V and EDWV re-
spectively, but these circles will be to each other in the
ratio L X is to L W. Since as shown in the figure, the
two resultants of the whole force, acting along the two
great circles, N D S V and E D W V as produced round
the whole Earth, are to one another in the ratio L X is
to L W, that is, in the ratio Sine N C E is to Cosine NCE,
that is, as Sine obliquity of Ecliptic is to Cosine
obliquity of the Ecliptic, these are the respective
velocity ratios of the resultants N D S V and EDWV
of the movement and impact of the atmosphere under
the orbital force of 19 — 24, 54 and Fig. 1, directed in
the Tidal Circle, L D K V, the great circle of the Earth
in the plane of the ecliptic, a movement of the atmosphere
directed against the ocean waters and solid Earth,
and producing by friction, impact and momentum
of the air against the waters and solid Earth,
the PRECESSION OF THE EQUINOXES and the SECULAR

51

RETARDATION OF THE EARTH'S ROTATION, the direc-
tion LDKV being exactly true in respect to the
action of the Sun, and only departing from the direction
shown, LDKV, by an amount not exceeding 5.^° in re-
spect to the action of the Moon, the amount of the inclin-
ation of the plane of the lunar orbit to that of the ecliptic,
the plane of the action of the Moon and its direction
varying between R D Q V, and M D O V according as the
pole of the lunar-terrestrial-orbital-axis is at B or G.

151.— The resultants N D S V and E D W V are on the
average for both bodies the Sun and the Moon, directed
through D and V the nodes of the ecliptic plane LDKV,
and equatorial plane W D E V and the figure under con-
sideration Fig. 2 is taken as being in the solstitial meri-
dian plane N W S E, with the node D in front at the
centre of the figure, and the node V behind the figure,
D C V being the nodal diameter of the Earth, and WOE
a solstitial diameter rectangular to D C V.

152. — Precession of the equinoxes as modified by the
Earth's diurnal rotation of 24 hours, consists of a rotation
on the axis PGA regarded as a momentary axis with
evanescent radii, but none the less a real rota-
tion on the axis PGA in a precessional clay of 25000
years, but consequent upon the radii being evan-
escent, and the conflict with the Earth's diurnal rota-
tion, and the necessity of continually changing the
plane of the latter, requiring a continual mani-
festation of force, and is a rotation without an acceleration
of velocity, just as a planet subjected to having its
tangential force destroyed in each quarter-revolution of
the orbit, requires that the primary orb continually put
forth force of gravitation to maintain the velocity of the
planet, and yet the latter has the period of its orbit
neither increased nor decreased, that is its average
velocity is neither increased nor decreased, and yet its
orbital velocity is performed by a force of average uni-
form acceleration or equivalent thereto.

153. — Precession and Nutation regarded as one phe-
nomenon, consists of the simultaneous rotation of the
Earth 011 two axes, the solstitial WOE, and the nodal
. D C V, superposed upon the 24 hour diurnal rotation on
the polar axis N C S.

154. — Thus in respect to Precession, Nutation, and
Secular Retardation the Earth must be regarded as
simultaneously rotating on three rectangular axes,
(1) the geographical, or polar axis N OS, (2) the sols-
titial - meridional -equatorial axis W C E that of the Pre-

64

cession, (3) the nodal-meridional-equatorial axis D 0 V
that of the Nutation, and this it actually is doing
and by the action of three forces or resultants in the
three planes, or that is by the orbital force 19 — 24, 54,
Fig. 1, and gravitation of the Sun and Moon on the
equatorial protuberance.

155. — But we have seen that orbital force 19 — 24, 54,
and Fig. 1, and impact friction and momentum of the
atmosphere under that force, can only produce the sec-
ular retardation by the cosine of the obliquity of the ec-
liptic components L W, Y K, or the resultant E D W V,
a negative rotation of the Earth from east to west, (that
is, if we regard the diurnal rotation which is from west
to east as positive) and a rotation N D S V on the solsti-
tial axis WOE, the latter of which would speedily make
the obliquity of the ecliptic 90° by rotating the axis of
the Earth into this plane. Hence manifestly there is a
third force at work rotating the Earth in the direction
E M L N produced round the Earth, that is to say, rotat-
ing the Earth on the nodal-meridian axis D C V in the
direction E M L N, and so on the average reducing the
angle N C P as fast as the rotation N D S V increases it.
It is the two rectangular forces N D S V and E M L N
alternately preponderating which produces the Nutation
of the Earth's axis, by varying the angle N O P, or that
is is the inclination of the ecliptic plane L C K to that of
the equator E C W.

156. — The question arises, what is the solstitial-meri-
dional force EMLNorWOKS which limits and deter-
mines the angle of the obliquity of the ecliptic and main-
tains it on the average at 23° 27/, and by its alternation,
with the force N D S V produces the Nutation of the
Earth's axis, a force E M L N balanced against the force
N D S V ? and the answer is manifestly the attraction
of the Sun and Moon on the protuberant equatorial
matter of the Earth, and greatest when these bodies
come to the solstices or that is attain their highest
declination in either hemisphere as they make their orbit
round the Earth and ml when they are in conjunction at
the nodes D and V.

157. — The force of gravitation of the Sun and Moon <
which acts on the protuberant matter of the equator and
tropics, acting alone, would remove the obliquity of the
ecliptic altogether, by drawing down the equatorial pro-
tuberance W D E V into the ecliptic plane K D L V, and
this it would do were the Earth entirely a solid mass
aud possessed of no atmosphere, whether the Earth were

5$

Stationary or possessed of diurnal rotation as at present.

158. — The atmospheric impact L D K V of orbital force
19 — 24, 51, by rateral recoil from the protuberant equa-
tor would speedily bring the polar axis N C S into the
plane of the equator N D W, so that the diurnal rotation
WD S V and tho orbital force movement of the atmos-
phere in the Tidal Circle L hKV should coincide as a
plane of least resistance and stable equilibrium, did not
the force E L N the attraction on the protuberant matter
of the equatorial and tropical regions limit this action.
Thus the particular angle of obliquity of the Earth and
a planet to its path about the primary, is determined by
atmospheric-precessional- tidal-nutational force acting on
a solid globe.

159. — Precession then of the equinoxes is due to a
nodal-meridional force N D S V directed on the average
in this plane, in the direction shown by the arrows, while
Nutation is clue to the conflict of this force with the
effects of solar and lunar gravitation on the protuberant
matter of the Earth's equator and tropical regions, a
force indicated by the arrows on E N WS, in this plane.

1()0. — The precessional rotation on the axis PGA would
still exist were the Earth a perfect sphere and possessed
of no equatorial protuberance and possessed of no diur-
nal rotation, by friction of the atmosphere under the
orbital force of 19 — 24. 54, urged round the Earth in the
Tidal Circle, L D K V against the waters of the ocean
and the solid Earth, but the Precessional rotation would
then be accelerative until the Earth acquired a high
velocity of rotation from east to west on the axis P C A.
161 — But in the absence of the diurnal rotation the whole
force L D K V would be engaged rotating the Earth on
the ecliptic axis P C A and instead of a Precession effec-
ted in 25000 years, the Precessional rotation would be
effected in a very much shorter period, and one continu-
ally shortening, because at present, of the whole force
19—24, 54, P E, G F of Fig. 1, LDK V of Fig. 2, there
is engaged a portion producing the Secular Retardation,
and calling the whole force unity, the quantity engaged
producing Precession equals Sin2 obliquity of the eclip-
tic, equals Sin 2 23 271 that is '158363, and that produc-
ing Secular Retardation equals Cos2 23° 27' that is '8416.

162. — We take the kinetic energy or pressure of the
atmospheric movement that producing Precession and
Secular Retardation as the square of its velocity, because
atmospheric pressure in a wind varies as the square of
the velocity, and atmospheric pressure under the orbital

u

force of 19—24, 54, P E G F of Fig. 1, L D K V of Fig. 2,
is a force of the character of wind movement, and acting
in the direction L D K V is the cause of the Precession
of the Equinoxes, and also of the Secular Retardation of
the Earth's diurnal rotation, these phenomena arising
from the two rectangular resultants or velocities of the
force L D K V respectively, which therefore are to each
other as Cos2 obliquity is to Sin2 obliquity.

163, — This kinetic movement of the atmosphere reaches
directly down to the surface of the Earth in the trade
wind zone, and produces kinetic and dynamic energy of
the trade winds by direct action, an action prevailing in
the equatorial regions between the circles of latitude of
30°, that is, over half the globe, while recoil therefrom or
reactionary currents prevail in the latitudes beyond 30°
and largely give rise directly to the anti-trade winds.

^164. — But the trade winds are really produced not only
by direct action of the force LD K V, and the anti-trade
winds, not only by recoil of the air moved by this force,
as it makes impact with the ocean waters and solid
Earth, but combined with and chiefly by outflow of air
from the Tidal Circle, from the tropics of Cancer and
Capricorn, as given in arguments 19 — 24t 54, and their
context, while if we take into consideration the inflow of
air into the Tidal Circle and tropics to replenish the out-
flow and embrace the whole atmospheric circulation, then
the atmospheric circulation regarded dynamically is ex-
pressedby the forces, directions, and amounts of Preces-
sion and Nutation, and kinetically and barometrically by
the tidal movements and currents of the ocean waters.

166. — We are now in a position to calculate the amount
of Secular Retardation of the Earth's rotation, and give
the quantity, so that this quantity may be used in calcu-
lating the secular advance of the Moon in longitude, in
so far as this is due to the Secular Retardation of the
Earth's rotation. The observed advance of the Moon in
longitude is about 12" of arc in a hundred years, and for
larger periods this quantity multiplied by the time
squared, thus in two centuries it will be 48'/, in three
centuries 108 /' and so on. Of this advance about the
half is believed to be due to the Secular Retardation of
the Earth's diurnal rotation, a retardation accelerative
as the time squared in the same manner as the Moon's
advance in longitude. But 6// of advance of the Moon in
longitude represents a retardation of the Earth's meri-
dian of 6// x 27.32, because the Earth rotates in angle,
this much faster than the Moon moves in its orbit, there-

55

fore the unexplained advance of the Moon in longitude,
represents a retardation of the Earth's diurnal rotation
of 1 6 4-'/ of arc in a century, or 656// of arc in two centuries,
or 1476// of arc in three centuries, and so on, superposed
upon the sum of the diurnal rotations. That is to say,
at the end of one century, the total loss of longitude of a
meridian of the Earth, the sum of the retardations on
every rotation, will for the whole century, be 164//of arc.
Let us see how this supposed quantity compares with
the actual amount of retardation, as now to be calculated
from the Precessional rotation, whose force compared
with that of the secular retardation equals Sin2 obliquity
of ecliptic is to Cos2 obliquity of the ecliptic, that is
as LX2 is to LW3 Fig. 2. The force LX Fig. 2
equals Sin3 obliquity of the ecliptic that is .3979492
and gives one complete rotation of the Earth on
the ecliptic axis P C A in 25000 years. Then the
value of L W is found from the ratio Sin2 23°27/ is to Cos2
23°27/ that is .3979492 is to .9174082 therefore .158363 is
to .841634 as one rotation of the Earth in 25000 years is
to T, where T is the number of diurnal rotations lost by
the Earth in the Secular Retardation in 25000 years. It
follows that in 25000 years, consequent upon the Secular
Retardation due to the atmospheric movement which
produces the Precession of the Equinoxes, the Earth
makes 5.3 diurnal rotations in this period, less than it
would have made had this retardation not existed, and
the Earth's diurnal rotation been constant in velocity,
and not subjected to retardation.

167. — Expressed in retardation for 100 years,in seconds
of arc, we have -53X360°X 60/X60// divided by 2502 equals
HO// of arc that arc by which a meridian of the Earth
falls behind the Moon in 100 years, by reason of the
secular retardation, and if the time be expressed by T
centuries, then 110/'/ T2 is the retardation for any period
of time. This 1107 the now calculated retardation com-
pares with 164// the unexplained part of the Moon's ad-
vance in longitude.

168. — But momentums have to be satisfied, and when
we consider the action of the Moon in producing the
secular retardation, the Moon and the Earth form a con-
servative system of force, in which the algebraic sum of
the momentums of the rotations and orbital motions
is constant, and after all other effects have been consi-
dered, if there is still an unexplained part of the Moon's
advance in longitude, we must assign this to reaction
upon the Moon arid Earth of the orbital force of 19— 24,54,

56

that is reaction from Precession, Atmospheric Circula-
tion, and Tides, as produced by the Moon, and they are
so produced in the ratio of about 5 is to 2, where 5 is the
lunar force, and 2 is the solar force, and these combined
forces produce the whole result. That is to say, the|veloc-
ity of Moon and Earth in the orbit about each other must
be quickened, and their momentum increased by reaction
from the precessional and tidal effects upon the Earth,
by an amount equal to the momentum of diurnal rota-
tion lost by the Earth. And when this is taken into
account the whole unexplained advance of the Moon of
6// of arc in a century is now fully accounted for.

169. — In all questions of reactions on bodies wide
apart in space such as the Earth and Moon, the planets
and Sun, not simply volume mass, or quantity of matter
must be taken into account, but also density ; and gravity
and inertia must be regarded as varying with the den-
sity, and inertia and gravity as varying together, so that a
body possessing small central force of gravity and mov-
ing in a field of feeble force of gravity must move rela-
tively faster to obtain a given momentum than if it
formed part of the mass of a larger body. Thus at the
surface of the Sun, by the action of solar gravity, bodies
fall 25 times more rapidly than upon the Earth, but as
inertia in the Sun is 25 times greater than upon the
Earth, and weight also 25 times greater, the actual
energy of the fall or momentum is not 25 times what the
Earth's force of gravity can confer in unit time, nor 252
but measured by energy evolved and work done on unit
mass, the minimum view of the force of gravity at the
surface of the Sun is 253 or 15625 times greater than that
at the surface of the Earth, while if we take into ac-
count that each unit of the work is done in a very much
shorter time than on theEarth,the unit 254is not too highan
estimate of the force of gravity at the surface of the Sun,
or 314000* at 4000 miles from the centre of the Sun,
a force almost too great for the mind to grasp, but a force
fully required by the mechanical energies engaged
evolving the solar radiation of light and heat. Or if we
say that kinetic energy of unit mass under gravitational
fall varies as the square of the velocity on Earth, then
when we take variations of velocity by gravitational fall
in different globes, kinetic energy varies as v4, since the
force which can produce a velocity of 25 in the Sun,
would consequent upon diminished force of inertia in the
Earth, produce a velocity of 625 on the Earth, or a kinetic
of 62&2 equal tp y*pr tt^t is velocity tp the

57

fourth power. But we may deal with this later onl
170. — We must not here digress any further in the way
of pointing the road to the new laws of motion as
required by, and following upon the discovery
that gravitation is a central force, a variable force, and pro-
duced by gravitative influence of the particles of the mass upon
each other and the field in which they lie, in a manner resem-
bling that cf magnetic induction ; but since in respect to
attraction of mass for mass, it is usual to take a magnet
as the type or analogy to gravitation, now that so much
is known of magnetism, will it not be proper to regard
almost its every attribute as the type of corresponding
features of gravitation, so that just as we have magnetic
induction or influence of the particles upon the axis or
centre of the magnet producing there a central force, — or
for that matter we may take the electrical helix as the
type, and then we obtain ether influence and magnetism
producing a central force, — so we have gravitational in-
fluence or induction generating the central force of gra-
vity in a mass, and then gravitation at a distance, and
cohesion of contact, resemble magnetism at a distance
and magnetism of contact.

171. — Personally we are persuaded that the laws of
electricity and magnetism in relation to the mass or
masses of matter and influences concerned, are in a sense
the laws of gravitation in relation to the mass.

172. — Heretofore gravitation has been considered as
"a feeble force requiring bodies of the size of planets to
manifest it," and so it would be did it vary simply as the
acceleration, but when it is regarded as varying in differ-
ent planets and globes as the acceleration cubed (or as the
fourth power of the acceleration if we regard kinetic
energy as proportionate upon the Earth to velocity
squared) and regard it as a central force whose amount
varies with the density of the mass inversely as the
distance squared of the mass from the centre multiplied
by the rise of the influence of the particles upon eacii
other, and upon the centre with that rise, as they are
compressed in density upon each other and upon the
centre, then gravitation instead of being a**feeble force,"
becomes THE GIANT OF THE UNIVERSE, quite capable of
controlling the electro-dynamic-magnetic movements
and conditions of the two internal globes or masses of
the Sun which by their movements form the 1. 1 second
oscillatory or rotatory electro-magnetic-solar dynamo,
and quite capable of controlling the mechanical solar
energies, as these are engaged developing the light and

58

heat of the Sun, which light and heat does not pervade
the entire solar mass, making it a hot body throughout,
giving off light and heat by a general cooling, but which
light and heat is produced by the mechanical movements
of two comparatively cold and magnetic bodies, composed
of ordinary material in the Sun combined with magnetic
matter, developing electricity and the products of elec-
trolysis, and combustion of electricity and the products
of electrolysis in the photosphere.

173* — But notwithstanding the vast energies in the
Sun, and they are millions-fold greater than ever here-
tofore supposed, the Sun is a conservative system
of mechanical forces, and none of the momentum of the
two opposed motions in the Sun, that is of the two
masses forming that body and in a state of collision or a
state resulting from the collision of two great bodies,
none of this momentum, and none of the energy thereof
can disappear, neither can the 1. 1 second period of os-
cillation or of central oscillation and rotation alter, except
by radiation of light and heat into space, or by change
of temperature of the Sun by change of density by ex-
pansion or contraction, (effects which are certainly oc-
curring in too comparatively feeble degree to affect the
value of the oscillating period in any appreciable degree
over wide intervals of time) and while electro-magnetic-
dynamic dissociation of positive and negative electricity
and of the chemical elements of ordinary matter occur on a
vast scale throughout the entire mass of the Sun, espe-
cially in the more cool and solid portions of the two cen-
tral oscillating masses, each of which is a globe or mass
thousands of times larger than our Earth, electric dis-
charge and chemical combustion occur in the photo-
sphere on the most gigantic scale (though the underlying
oceans and crust are kept cool by the electric and vapor
expansions and eruptions),yet there are electric current
returns and electro-magnetic returns which sustain the
mechanical conditions, of the internal oscillation or os-
cillatory-rotation, except in so far as the solar en-
ergies are radiated into space.

175. — The greatest force of gravity anywhere in the
solar system under the Newtonian views of gravitation
is only 25 times that of the force of gravity at the sur-
face of the Earth, and altogether inadequate to control
the mechanical energies of the Sun, and account for the
intensity of its light and heat, a radiation resulting from
these energies, which light and heat and radiation is as
immediately developed from day to day, and from year

to year from the mechanical motions, and is as new a
creation as the harvests produced thereby. The origin-
ating mechanical motions giving rise to the solar radia-
tion, are not etherial, are not molecular, but motions of
translation, and rotation of two material masses, which
together form the entire mass or major portion of the
Sun, and are both for the most part cool solid bodies.
The heat and light of the Sun producing this year's
harvest may be said to have had no existence last year
as temperature in the Sun, but only a mechanical exis-
tence, viz., that of the movements of the two great
masses of matter forming the Sun, which by their relative
motions, and endowed with magnetism, and acting in-
ductively on each other and by friction, are thereby giving
rise to the solar radiation as a result of the inter-
nal electro dynamic and mechanical energies all controlled
by the central force of solar gravity, and constituting the
Sun an electro-magnetic dynamo, differing only in scale
and the perfection of its parts, purposes, and adaptabili-
ties from the electro-magnetic-dynamos of our physical
laboratories, electrical engineers, and light installations,
and surpassing these as much as the glory of the heavens
surpasses that of the Earth, or as much as the magnitude
and dignity of the Earth, surpasses that of a grain
of sand.

176. — Until the Newtonian views of gravity are largely
abandoned and entirely revised, and it is recognised
that gravitation is a central force and increasing to the
centre of a mass at least by the law of inverse squares,
or under a proper view of the laws of force, varying at
least inversely as the fourth power of the distance from
the centre all the way to the centre, until this is recog-
nised, the inhabitants of this world will never under-
stand why the Sun shines, and the intensity of its
radiation.

177. — A magnet or an electro-magnet and a piece of
soft iron pull each other with equal force, but the pull by
the soft iron on the magnet is derived from the force of
the latter. We may compare the pull with that of a
ship's engine by means of a cable pulling a boat to the
ship. Action and reaction are equal, but the fuel on the
ship does the work. There is 110 force in the boat but
what is thrown into it from the ship, similarly while un-
der the influence of the magnet, the soft iron will pull
other iron to itself, but not with a force simply propor-
tionate to its mass; but also dependent upon distance
of the magnet from which it receives its force ; siniil-

60

arly the pull of lib of matter on the Earth when at the
surface of the Earth, though it is lib, it is derived from
the whole force of gravity in the Earth, whose re-
sultant is the central force of gravity, and the 1 Ib of
matter will pull other matter than the Earth towards
itself, and its matter will cohere, but not with a force
simply proportionate to its mass, but also dependent upon
its distance from the Earth's centre. Thus, however
many pounds of matter we aggregate and weigh at the
surface of the Earth towards the Earth, if we do not change
their distance from the influencing Earth, we do not
alter the result, but only sum the Earth's force, in re-
spect to the units of matter acted on by the Earth,
neither do we determine the laws of gravitation in
respect to aggregation of mass, and to assume that we
do so, as does the Newtonian system, is only to beg the
question ; the laws of gravitation unless our methods
become more refined, can only be deduced from the mo-
tions of planetary masses and their influence and per-
turbations upon each other at different distances, or by
effects of cohesion under different compresses. The
Earth and Moon possess less force of attraction for each
other for a given distance apart, when at aphelion of the
Earth's orbit than when at perihelion, consequent upon
receiving a decreased quantity of mutual influence; and
also for external matter generally ; and this effect must
be considered in determining the exact form and dimen-
sions and period of the orbit about each other at different
portions of the year, an effect which must be classed
under perturbations of the orbit. We must look upon all
the orbs of space as moving in different densities of ether,
and regard the density as rising with the aggregation
of matter, and regard the central force of gravity of each
orb, as rising with the density, and we may also regard
the density of ether as affecting the velocity of light by a
lawsuch,that in the interstellar spaces, while the elasticity
is exalted the density is reduced,so that in the interstellar
spaces light travels with an immensely greater velocity
than it does in the solar system. That part of space to-
ward which the force of gravitation acts with the great-
est power, is the part where the velocity of light is least,
and that part of space towards which gravitation is most
feebly directed is the part where the velocity of light is
greatest. Hence light comes from the most distant star
in an almost incredibly short space of time, and with an
almost incredible velocity as compared with its velocity
when transmitting the solar system,great as is the latter.

i?8. — But to return to the primary subjects of this
treatise viz. Atmospheric Circulation, Oceanic Tides and
Currents, Precession of the Equinoxes, Secular Retard-
ation, and Nutation, all of which are now ripe for solu-
tion, and the immediate placing thereof, upon a true and
practical basis, adapted for all purposes of utility con-
nected therewith; that is to say, the time is now ripe
for rendering the knowledge of these things an exact
science, and to lead to this result, is one of the objects
of this publication.

y<

FIG. 3.

Correlation of the barometrical pressure on the globe with the force which
produces Precession of the Equinoxes, Secular Retardation, and Oceanic Tides
and Currents.

179.— In Fig. 3 lettered as in Fig.'s 1 and 2 the two
barometrical maximums of the atmosphere are shown in
the tropics resting on the highest declinations attained
by the Tidal Circle L D K V the circle of orbital force of
Fig. 1, the circle of the Processional and Secular Retard-
ation force ; and the oceanic tides and currents stand in
relation to the rotation of the Earth carrying the various
regions of the Earth towards or from the maximums
L and K, and to the winds going forth over the surface of
the Earth from these maximums and into the corre-
sponding barometrical minimums or relative mini-
mums at or near quadrature with L and K on the mer-
idian in which L and K are situated, L D K V the Tidal
Circle or orbital force circle as arrowed represents the
direction of the en masse movement of the atmosphere by
the orbital force 19 — 23,51 and Fig 1, and bisects the
movement of the atmosphere in the North and South
ecliptic hemispheres, a movement which extends all the

way td tHe Ecliptic or Tidal Poles P and A, in parallel
circles to L D K V of decreasing length towards the
Poles P and A, that is circles of ecliptic or tidal latitude,
the precessional or secular retardation force or move-
ment of the atmosphere in respect to each circle varying
as the square of the length of each circle, and the force
and movement of the atmosphere, the en masse move-
ment, attains the highest velocity along L D KV, and has
its average resultant in the ecliptic plane along the di-
rection L D K V, or that is along the plane of the Earth's
orbital motion about the Moon and Sun.

180. — With the Sun and the Moon in conjunction along
the diameter K C L of the Earth, there is a strong E.N.E
en masse movement of the atmosphere over the a.m., or
morning half of the globe, or that is a movement parallel
to L D K as the atmosphere moves across the descend-
ing node D of the Precessional movement, while in the
p.m., or evening half of the globe there is a correspond-
ing E.S.E en masse movement of the atmosphere as it
moves parallel to K V L across the ascending node V of
the precessional movement, and in all latitudes the wind
will veer daily according as the local conditions are
affected by this entire movement of the atmosphere, and
according as this entire movement is encountered in the
daily rotation. Thus if the wind be observed for one day
from sunrise to sunset, and at sunrise it be approxim-
ately N.E,.then in the afternoon it will probably veer- to
a position approximately S.E.,but the law of the shifting
of the wind will be variable from sunrise to sunset, ac-
cording to the position of the Sun and Moon, and accord-
ing to the initial a.m. direction of the wind. I need
scarcely say that the observed general law of wind is
that it veers or backs every day with the motion of the
Sun and Moon across the sky.

181. — The impact of the atmosphere LD K V of Figs.
1, 2, and 3, and context, or that is the Precessional re-
sultant N D S V of the impact, if acting alone would make
the obliquity of the ecliptic 90°, but the attraction of the
Sun and Moon on the protuberant equator and tropics
acts to remove the obliquity and to limit the action of the
inclining or Precessional force, and the play of the
two forces, the protuberance force and the precessional
force, having their average resultants in two rectangular
planes respectively viz. the solstitial E N W S and the
Nodal N D S V the play of the two forces alternately pre-
vailing produces the Nutation.

182. — The mean direction of the Precessional and Sec-

63

ular Retardation movement of the atmosphere is through
the nodes D and V of the ecliptic and^equator. Between
ihe nodes by the passage of the atmosphere over the
Earth in the tropics, that is, as the air passes from node
to node round the Earth along the direction L D K V of
the Precessional movement, the protuberant equator of
the globe is recoiling by lateral friction from the atmos-
pheric movement, this initially and at its origin deter-
mining the inclination, and now aiding to determine and
maintain the obliquity, and the lateral recoil is largely
responsible for and gives rise to the inclination of the
lunar orbit to the terrestrial equator, and must ever pre-
vent the coincidence of these two planes.

183. — From 182 and what has gone before, it may be
clearly seen that the inclinations of the rotations of the
various bodies of the solar system to their various orbits
about their companions or primaries, are not determined
by accident, but are the expressions of Precessional and
Nutational forces acting through their atmospheres upon
their oceans and solid globes, and thus giving rise to
their inclinations. Hence the inclinations may be made
to indicate whether the body possesses a solid globe or
otherwise, and from this it will be found that the Sun is
for the most part a solid globe, acted on by Precessional
and Nutational forces, arising from the gravitation of
Jupiter and the other planets.

184. — The inclination of the Sun to the path of the
planets possesses a limiting angle, but the Sun is subject
to Nutation, as shown by the periodical displacement of
the Sun spots, as they transmit the disc.

185. — This displacement may be made to indicate the
whereabouts of the intra mercurial planets,

186.— In Fig. 4, let K C L be the diameter of the Earth
which produced along 0 L passes through the centre of
the Moon given in conjunction at new Moon over L,
then a plane containing PGA any diameter of the Earth
rectangular to K O L is the plane of the Rational Horizon.
Everywhere from the Rational Horizon in the day hem-
isphere there is a fall of air towards L by gravitation to
the Sun and Moon, and everywhere from the Rational
Horizon in the night hemisphere there is a movement of
air towards K by the action of inertia of its particles re-
sisting the fall towards L. Hence the air moves con-
vergingly on to L and K from the Rational Horizon over
the entire surface of the respective hemispheres under
L and K, that is the air moves convergingly on to the
centre or zenith of the day and night hemispheres. But

64

•while the air moves about C L and C K in the manner
given, or is subject to the force or forces which would
so move it, it is deflected by the force P E and G F, the
orbital force of 19—23, 54, Figs. 1, 2 and context, acting
in a direction tangential or i.e. rectangular to C L and
C K. The effect of the force directed to K and L is to
convert the atmosphere into a prolate spheroid about the
axis K C L and the effect of the force P E and G F is to
deflect the ends of the prolate spheroid in the direction
PE and GF by about 2 hours of arc, so that the resultant
of all the forces under consideration is to convert the
atmosphere into a prolate spheriod, with an axis about
30° from the axis K C L of Figs. 3 and 4 instead of about
K C L, and thus is set up a barometrical maximum about
30° west of L in the day hemisphere, and another about
30° west of K in the night hemisphere, from which issue
the trade winds, anti-trades, and the circulation of the
atmosphere generally as it affects the base of the atmos-
phere, as shown in Figs. 3 and 4.

FIG. 4.

Circulation of the Atmosphere.

187. — The ecliptic meridian circle P L A K as deflected
by orbital force is the great circle of high barometer, and
low tide of the ocean, from which issue the winds and
the waters, thereby giving rise to low tide along these
circles, and P C A nearly coinciding with the Rational

Horizon or rotated therefrom thrcfugh east to west about
30° is the great circle of low barometer towards which
the winds blow over the surface of the Earth at the base
of the atmosphere carrying the ocean waters with them
into this circle, and so this circle is the circle of high-tide
of the ocean, in so far as high tide may be associated with
a great circle of the Earth. The circles PLAK and
PGA follow the motions of the Moon rather than those
of the Sun, so that the lunar Rational Horizon is the
circle of high tide of the ocean, rather than the solar
rational horizon, and only coinciding with the latter at
the conjunctions, and always deflected over the Earth to
the westward by about 2 to 3 hours of arc by the force
PG, G F, the deflection being greatest at the conjunc-
tions and its variation producing the diurnal inequality
of the tides. The action of the Moon outweighs that of
the Sun and is at all times similar to the illustrations just
given, but at the quadratures and intermediate positions
the effects stand related to a resultant of the Sun and
Moon obtained by drawing the parallelogram of their for-
ces, and regarding the two bodies as a single orb placed
at the end of the diagonal or diagonal produced. When
applied to the tides the position and velocity of this diago-
nal in arc determines the position and hour of the tides.
The general figure of the atmospheric circulation for the
conjunction of both New and Full Moon, and at all times
to a large extent is that of Fig. 4, and regarding P C A
as the rational horizon of the combined orbs or their re-
sultant. This circle is a circle of doldrums as it were,
comparable more or less with the doldrums of the equa-
tor, so that the observer carried through this circle in
the daily rotation may expect comparative calm at the
hour of transit.

188. — The atmospheric circulation is a fall of the air by
gravitation convergingly to the position occupied by the
Moon or the position of the resultant of the Sun and
Moon, in the hemisphere occupied by these bodies, and a
movement of the air as the result of inertia convergingly
on to the nadir to these bodies in the opposite hemi-
spheres, modified by a movement of the air in the direc-
tion of the impact producing the Precession of the Equin-
oxes and Secular Retardation, the air moving en masse
in the ecliptic plane or plane of the lunar orbit on to the
descending and ascending nodes or that is with a result-
ant cutting the Equator at the nodes, hence the atmos-
phere is simultaneously moving over the Earth from the
poles of the Precessional movement on to the planes of

the orbits of the Moon and Sun or joint resultant plane,
with return currents to the Precessional poles to supply
the place of the air removed, and also in a direction that
of the Precessional rotation L D K V of Fig. 2. That is,
as illustrated by Figs. 2 and 4 the air is moving from the
poles P and A into the circle L D K V in its upper limits,
and returning from the circle L D K V to the poles P and
A in its lower limits, and . at the same time revolving
en masse round the axis P C A in the direction L D K V
over the rotating Earth, and opposed to the latter in re-
spect to one resultant, and producing the Precession of
the Equinoxes in respect to the other, and the Oceanic
Tides are due to the action and reaction of these atmos-
pheric movements acting on its waters as these are car-
ried round by the rotating Earth in the diurnal rotation.

189. — With the Sun and Moon at L in Fig. 2 as the
air converges on to L by gravitation to these bodies
radially from the great circle P D A V, and by the orbital
force L D K V is swept round from ecliptic east to ecliptic
west over the whole hemisphere in one broad sheet of
air movement, the entire hemisphere of air is directed
into the arc L D and with a force greatest in the ecliptic
plane, the plane L D K V, and this movement of the at-
mosphere produces a barometrical maximum the greatest
on the Earth in the arc L D and directly over the low
tide of the ocean cradle, which is in the arc L D, and
from the arc LD the atmospheric currents move to
form the trade winds and anti-trades, but the movement
is masked by the rotation of the Earth, and diffuses it-
self over the tropics as a result of the rotation, as given
in the former part of this treatise.

190. — Again as the air is swept along the arc V L D by
the force VLB, the force being greatest at the point L
directly under the tidal force of the Moon and Sun, it is
abstracted by this force from the arc V L, that is from
the region of high tide of the ocean, and in the arc V L
there results a barometrical minimum as compared with
the barometrical maximum in L D.

191. — Hence from the effects 188-190 there arises the
diurnal oscillation of the barometer as the result of Tidal,
Precessional, and Secular Retardation forces, and not as
the result of thermal forces, to which heretofore the os-
cillation has been attributed.

192. — Again the forces of the air movement in the
hemisphere P K A directed on to K. and through K the
nadir to the Moon and Sun and from the arc P D A V
being similar to those of the hemisphere P L A viz* a con-

67

Vergence of air on to K and a Precessional and Secular
Retardation rush through K in the direction DKV,
these forces produce a barometrical minimum in the arc
of high tide of the ocean D K; and a barometrical maxi-
mum in the arc of low tide of the ocean K V, similar to
those of the opposite arcs.

193. — The continent of America interposed in the Pre-
cessional impact of air L D K V and parallels Fig. 2
prevents the ocean waters from passing from east to
west across the space occupied by these continents,hence
when these continents are passing under the Moon, the
waves are forced from the leeward side of the continents
into the basin of the Pacific, withdrawing water from
the western shores of the continent, this action being
greatest as the shores transit the circle P L A K, and
greatest of all at the points K and L in respect to the
force L D K V, but as the ocean tides may be regarded
as a recoil of the waters from the impact, the greatest
force of impact occurs when the greatest force of LDK V
is in the equator, that is when the Moon and Sun are in
conjunction in the equator, and this position will mark
an establishment of the tides and atmospheric circulation
both of which are largely polarised by continental
reflection and other causes.

194. — The polarisation of the oceanic tides is such as
to make the force L D K V, as a descending force in re-
spect to the portion LDK, pass down the Pacific Ocean,
while as an ascending force K V L it passes up the At-
lantic. Thus as a result of polarisation of the oscillation
we may say that there is a descending tide and an as-
cending tide, a descending tide in the Pacific Ocean
which passes down the east coast of the old world and
along its southern shores, and an ascending tide in the
Atlantic which passes up the shores of both the old and
the new worlds.

195. — The high tide of the ocean on the east coast and
southern coasts of the old world is partly produced by direct
action of the Precessional and Secular Retardation im-
pact pushing the waters before it and producing a forced
tidal wave, the tides in the Atlantic are an offshoot or
lateral development of this, while on the contrary the
tides on the western coasts of the American continents
are due to reaction of the waters as the force L D K V is
withdrawn by the rotation of the Earth carrying the
continents into quadrature with the luminary.

196, — Thus the tides in the region of the old world ex-
ternal to the Atlantic are due largely to direct action of

68

the force L D K V, while the tides of the Atlantic are due
largely to secondary action to the force LDKV, the
force P E, G F of Fig. 1, and the tides of the western
shores of the American continents are due to reaction
of the waters as the force LDKV or that is P E, G F
is withdrawn by the continents passing into quadrature
with the luminary that is into the positions B and K of
Fig. 1 in the diurnal rotation.

197. — The tidal oscillation is not reversed except by
land deflection and polarisation as described, and we
may consider the Earth as covered by two oceanic tides,
a tide of direct action and a tide of reaction, or to some
extent by many oceanic tides, according as the distribu-
tion of land and water breaks the ocean and seas into
many basins, each of which has its own effects.

198. — The fundamental outstanding controlling view
to take of the tides is that they are caused by the endea-
vour of the air and ocean particles to pursue elliptic
paths about the Moon and Sun, in accordance with their
distances from the luminary, an endeavour to obey
Kepler's three laws of planetary motion in respect to the
attraction of the Moon and Sun, and this view accepted
then the effects can be traced and numerical analysis can
be applied to determine the sequence of action.

199.— Precession of the Equinoxes and Nutation can
determine all the kinetic and dynamic quantities involved
in and resulting from the tidal forces.

200.— The Equilibrium Tidal Theory would express all
the facts did the Ocean Tides result from direct action
of the Moon and Sun upon the waters, and the fact that
the Equilibrium Tidal Theory does not hold, but is about
as far from the actual state of the case as it could possibly
be, this fact alone indicates that the Ocean Tides
are not produced by direct action upon the waters, and
the only other view open is that they are secondary to
the atmospheric movements.

201. — Especially would the Equilibrium Theory express
all the facts were the oceanic tides due only to tidal
compress.

202. — Were the oceanic tides due to tidal compress
whether direct or reversed the tidal phases would be at
the conjunctions and quadratures instead of in the inter-
mediate octants, and because the phases are generated in
these octants it is clear that the oceanic tides are not due
to the action of the Moon and Sim directly upon the
waters.

203.— It appears to the writer, that for all practical

purposes except in so far as acted upon by movements
of the atmosphere, in respect to tidal action, the ocean
must act as though it were part of the solid Earth, and
be incapable in respect of that action of either rising into
or becoming a tidal crest, or falling into, or becoming a
tidal trough. In order that the tides may prevail, since
water is practically an incompressible fluid, there must
be actual translation of the waters in order to produce
the tidal oscillation, and such translation forms part of
the Precessional and Secular Retardation impact. For
this kinetic movement the atmosphere acting upon the
waters, being highly elastic and compressible and free to
move, is eminently adapted to force the wave, and make
the ocean tides.

204. — Yet if the reader chose to regard the tides
as due to direct action of the Moon and Sun upon the
waters, they are still due to the forces under considera-
tion, the force P E, G F illustrated in Fig. 1, the force
L D K V of Fig. 2, the Precessional and Secular Retard-
ation forces, bringing the fluids into conflict with the solid
globe.

205. — But since the range of barometrical pressures is
equal to the displacement of the ocean bed by the tides,
surely it is not irrational to suppose that the latter are
related to the former. The atmospheric fluctuations
can range over 4 inches of barometer, and this itself is
equal to an oscillation of the ocean over about 4 feet of
level. And clearly the changes of barometrical pressure
can never represent the whole force acting on the atmos-
phere, because even while the atmosphere is piling above
under the Precessional and Secular Retardation force, it
is descending upon and flowing away at the base, and
the kinetic energy of the winds under the orbital force
of 19 — 23, 24, 54, Figs. 1, 2 and context, must exceed the
barometric expression or potential. Under these forces
the winds are subject to directive action dependent upon
lunar-solar time, and under this directive action the en-
ergy of movement of the atmosphere over its entire
depths and over the ocean waters is quite sufficient to
account for the tidal oscillations of the oceans, and quite
sufficient to act as the Precessional and Secular Retard-
ation impact.

206. — If we consider the ocean waters as in excess in
the high tide octants immediately in advance of the
Moon and anti-moon they can only be there as the result
of an atmospheric pressure of the two atmospheric tidal
crests or barometrical inaxiinunis, and kinetic move-

ments of the winds going out from these two regions of
high barometer.

207. — In 205 and context we have indicated that the
kinetics of the atmosphere and changes of barometric
pressure, the movements of the two barometrical maxi-
mums over the ocean in the diurnal rotation and the out-
going winds, and the kinetic movement of the atmos-
phere from east to west to produce the Precession and
Secular Retardation, that the kinetics and pressures of
these movements are quite equal to the kinetics and
changes of level of the ocean, and are in force and energy
more than sufficient to produce the latter and to give rise
to the oceanic tides and currents. And in the various
sections or arguments we have credited the atmospheric
movements with sufficient force to produce that move-
ment of the solid Earth which rotates or deflects it so as
to give rise to the Precession of the Equinoxes and retard
the diurnal rotation and produce the Secular Re-
tardation.

208. — Clearly there is no direct action of the Moon
upon the waters of the ocean which can throw these
waters into a protuberance in advance of the Moon's
position, without such throwing force accelerating the
Earth's rotation. The force which advances the waters
from west to east must necessarily be a force accelerat-
ing the Earth's rotation. No such force exists, on the
contrary the tidal forces are the forces which are produc-
ing the Secular Retardation of the Earth's rotation, and
therefore, are forces which act from east to west, in
short are the forces of Figs 1 and 2. Consequently if it be
admitted that there is a tidal protuberance of the ocean in
advance of the Moon, say on the meridian two hours
after the Moon culminates, then this protuberance is not
produced direptly by the tidal forces, which forces act
from ecliptic east to ecliptic west to produce the Pre-
cession and Secular Retardation. Therefore on this view
of the position of the oceanic protuberance, necessarily
the oceanic tides are secondary to the atmospheric move-
ments, and the kinetics of the latter in the Precessional
and Secular Retardation and producing the latter out-
weigh those of any direct action of tidal forces of the
Moon and Sun upon the waters.

209. — In so far as the Secular Retardation is due to
the weight of a stationary tidal wave or oceanic protu-
berance resting upon and acting as a brake upon the
rotating Earth, and to which action the Secular Retard-
ation has heretofore been assigned, even if such a sta-

71

tionary protuberance exist, it can have no appreciable
effect to produce the Secular Retardation; while in no
case can the vertical pressure or weight of such wave
produce the Precession of the equinoxes which is due to
a force tangential to the Earth's radii, and is a rotation
of the Earth in a meridional plane rectangular to that of
the diurnal rotation, and involves an impact or force with
a tangential resultant in the direction of this rotation.

210. — But let us consider what is the exact character
of the oceanic tides.

211. — The oceanic tides are not a great swelling of the
ocean always existent over two quadrants of the globe
and forming the ends of a prolate spheroid, with a corre-
sponding depression of the waters over the other quad-
rants or equator of the oblongated spheroid, but may be
defined as a series of elevations and depressions or tidal
waves which have had a common origin in a given region
of the globe. So that when the whole ocean is consid-
ered, there is scarcely any protuberance except local
protuberances of small area, and though the Moon and
Sun or the direction of their tidal force are varying in
declination over more than 50° of meridional arc of the
Earth, the oceanic tides however much they may vary
in height, appear to originate always in the same part of
the ocean, and for the most part to pursue a common
course over the globe, appearing to have their origin in
the Pacific Ocean near the Galapagos Islands, and from
there proceeding to all the shores of the ocean, arriving
successively on these shores, at times of arrival depend-
ing upon the distance of the shores from the Galapagos
and the course pursued by the tidal waves over the
globe after they leave the region of the Galapagos Islands.

212. — In point of fact the ocean tides in their origin are
polarised on a single rectilineal axis or direction, as a
rectilineal oscillation, and have their origin about the
one end of a single diameter of the Earth emergent on the
equator in the Pacific Ocean in west longitude 90°, this
diameter of the Earth being the axis of the oscillation,
and the region of the Galapagos being that in which the
oceanic tides originate, the cradle of the movement from
which they are propagated in sequence to all parts of the
ocean, and this region is the only source of the oceanic
tides, and twice in each lunar day at intervals of twelve
lunar or tidal hours, there is an oceanic tide produced on
the ocean in this region of the Galapagos, from which
it disperses to the ocean shores of all parts of the world.
On the ends of the Galapagos diameter and in the

72

neighbourhood of the Galapagos twice in each tidal clay
the waters of the ocean are elevated into a protuberance
comparatively local in character and of short duration
in time in crest phase, and twice in each tidal day the
waters sink into a corresponding tidal trough or depres-
sion, and this oscillation of level of the ocean at the Gal-
apagos constitutes the tides in their origin, and is pro-
pagated frcm the region of the Galapagos in tidal waves
which spread over the entire ocean, the tidal wave of
each oscillation taking more than a tidal day to reach
the furthest shores, and ere it has reached the furthest
shores is succeeded by the tidal wave of another oscilla-
tion, that of a succeeding tide, and by those of other
succeeding tides, all originated in the Galapagos region,
so that there are at all times in the ocean several tidal
waves, crests and troughs, but all of which for the whole
globe have originated at the Galapagos and each been
produced separately and successively by the single po-
larised oscillation of this region of the ocean, an oscil-
lation which as already indicated may be termed a
rectilineal oscillation of the ocean waters polarised on
the Galapagos diameter of the Earth.

213. — Thus if we take into consideration all the tidal
waves simultaneously existing on the ocean, the form of
the ocean may be regarded as that of a symetrical sphere,
or taking account of the Earth's rotation, that of an ob-
late spheroid bulging at the Equator, ruffled by tidal
ridges and troughs which have come from the Galapagos
region hy wave motion or propagation, so that apart from
the bulging equator of the oblate spheroid, the ocean
cannot be regarded as protuberant anywhere unless at
the Galapagos in proportion as the tidal oscillation of that
region is in crest phase, neither can it be regarded as
depressed any where unless at the Galapagos in proportion
as the tidal oscillation of that the tidal cradle is in trough
phase, neither can the ocean be regarded as a prolate
spheroid whose ends are two tidal crests, and whose
equator is two tidal troughs, such as the Equilibrium
Theory of the Tides supposes, and such as the theory of
direct action of tidal force upon the waters exerted
radially would require.

214. — On the Galapagos the ocean is protuberant about
2 hours after the culmination of the Moon on the meri-
dian of that region, and depressed about 8 hours after
the culmination of the Moon, and this Galapagos oscilla-
tion originates all the tidal waves of the ocean over its
entire area, passing in sequence from the Galapagos

73

from east to west round the entire globe and entering
the Atlantic from both east and west, passing up the
Atlantic all the way to the Polar Regions, the tide which
reaches the latter having originated in the Galapagos
about two tidal days before arriving near the Pole.

215. — From the Galapagos, the tidal waves resulting
from the Galapagos oscillation, move up the western
coast of North America and down the western coast of
South America entering the Atlantic near the ter-
minal cape of that continent ; on the other hand, the
tidal radiation from the Galapagos centre can be traced
as a tidal wave moving from east to west across the
Pacific Ocean, and, striking the Old World, can be traced
down its eastern and along its southern coasts, and still
careering westwards (entering the Bay of Bengal and
Arabian Sea in passing) through the Indian Ocean, can
be traced past the Cape of Good Hope, and turning into
the Atlantic, is found moving all the way to the North
Polar Regions. Thus from the Galapagos there is an
East going and a West going Tidal wave, and these
waves meet and superpose at the southern entrance to
the Atlantic, thus modifying the flow of the tides up the
Atlantic, but all this flow has originated at the Galapagos
as the centre of radiation.

216. — The flow of the Tidal waves from the Galapagos
resembles that of a sound or light radiation, whose vib-
ration is transverse, and whose wave length is about 96°
of arc of the Earth, say in round numbers 6600 miles
from trough to trough or crest to crest, and there are
troughs and crests, at this distance on the average all
along the tidal course, following each other for every
conjunction and opposition of the Pacific Ocean and the
Old World land protuberance with the tide producing
orb or orbs, the Moon or the resultant of the Moon and
Sun combining their forces.

217. — All the crests and troughs of the series of Tidal
waves which cover the ocean in its entirety, of which at
any moment there are not less than six of each phase
moving over the globe, are replicas of the crests and
troughs of the ocean waters which occur alternateJy-
consecutively in the Galapagos, and have originated in
this centre, two of each phase in a Tidal clay and have
been received by transmission or radiation from this
centre, regarded as the source and centre of radiation for
all the tides of the ocean.

218. — The rising of the oceanic waters or wave crest
of the Galapagos is radiated outwards in g,H directions,

74

the radiation producing the flooding of the contiguous
American shores by the eastward and meridional direc-
tions of movement ; and of every shore in succession for
all parts of the world by the constant moving of the
crest across the Pacific, the time of rising at successive
shores being determined by the distance from the Gala-
pagos centre of radiation, and velocity of wave propaga-
tion. The sinking of the oceanic waters or wave trough
of the Galapagos is similarly propagated in succession to
all parts of the ocean.

219. — If the ocean was everywhere of uniform depth
the wave crests and troughs would travel as circular
waves moving out radially from the Galapagos, but vari-
able depths and land deflections produce reflections and
refractions of the directions taken, but all of which can
be easily traced ; and the directions taken by the tidal
waves as they proceed from the Galapagos; with the
variations of velocity, are a measure of the ocean depths
such, that a cotidal chart gauges the depth of the ocean
with an accuracy proportionate to that of the chart. A
correct cotidal chart is as it were a pantogiaphic repre-
sentation of the ocean bed and ocean depths.

220. — As the crest of waters at the Galapagos falls in
phase, the phase is radiated away along the course of the
tidal wave, striking the western shores of America first.
As the trough of waters at the Galapagos fills up, the
phase is radiated away along the directions taken by the
Tidal wave, striking the western shores of America first.
But even while moving eastward and meridionally on to
America, crest and trough career also in every other
radial direction, and westward across the Atlantic as the
chief direction of the Tidal wave.

221. — To trace the path of phase of the Tidal wave from
the Galapagos, fetch a compass round the Galapagos
over the globe, and if the proper time interval be taken
the phase originated in the Galapagos will be on this
circle, except that allowance must be made for reflection
and refraction by depth and contour of the ocean bed,
but the radial view under consideration is the true view
of the tides.

222. — A single glance at a map or a terrestrial globe
will show that the atmosphere and ocean; the air and
waters, in respect to east and west are both in mass ec-
centrically situated upon the side of the Earth occupied
by the Pacific basin, both air and water being displaced
from the opposite side of the globe by agreat protuberance
of land forming the Old World and stretching down over

76

Australia and the intervening and contiguous islands, or
we may regard the land hemisphere as including the
continents of both the Old and New Worlds. Hence the
solid Earth and the enclosing fluids, those of the ocean
and atmosphere form a pair or group whose centres of
gravity do not coincide, being eccentrically situated in a
diameter of the Earth emergent at the centre of the
Pacific, and which is at quadrature or almost at quadra-
ture with the Galapagos or tidal diameter, which latter
forms the axis of the rectilineal polarised tidal oscillation
(see 212). Hence, as the Earth makes the orbit through
space round the Tidal Orb (the Moon, or Moon and Sun
in combination) and rotates, when the centre of the
Pacific and the Tidal Orb are in conjunction, that is,
when the centres of gravity of the solid Earth and en-
closing fluids are in conjunction with the Tidal Orb, then
the ocean and atmosphere are moved en-masse with a
force urging them in the orbit with greater velocity than
the orbital velocity produced upon the solid Earth,whieh
latter lies more remote from the Tidal Orb than the en-
closing fluid-sphere ; on the other hand, when the centre
of the Earth, Pacific, and Tidal Orb are in opposition,
then the fluid-sphere about the Earth is moved with a
force urging it in the orbit with a velocity less than that
conferred upon the solid Earth, hence necessarily ensues
a tangential oscillation of the solid Earth and the
enclosing fluid-sphere in the orbit, a to-and-fro mo-
tion of each in a tidal day, in which the momen-
tums of the solid Earth and enclosing fluids are equal
each to each but in opposite directions and are
varying with a reversal and a zero point, occur-
iug at the quadratures twice in a Tidal day. This oscilla-
tion of the fluid-sphere affects the ocean on the Pacific
side of the globe, and affects the solid Earth on the land-
ward side of the globe. Hence necessarily there is an
oscillation of the solid Earth and the enclosing fluid
sphere, and one in which the matter of the water and air
at every conjunction and opposition of the centre of the
solid Earth, the Pacific and Tidal Orb, is deflected round
the Earth in a direction from east to west, acting to
produce the Atmospheric and Oceanic Circulation and
the Secular Retardation.

223. — But the ocean waters and the enclosing atmos •
phere are themselves eccentrically situated on the Equa-
torial-Pacific diameter of the Eirth, so that ocean and
atmosphere may be regarded as alternately coming into
conjunction, quadrature, opposition and quadrature, aucl

76

in this order, with the Tidal Orb. Hence in respect io
this conjunction and opposition the ocean waters and air
will oscillate on the Pacific in a tidal interval, or two os-
cillations in a lunar or Tidal day, in such a way that high
tide of the air will tend to give low tide of the ocean,
and vice versa, that is, give conditions which are ob-
served conditions of the tides of the ocean and barome-
trical distribution of the air. See Figs. 7, 8, 9, 10.

224. — We have indicated what vast considerations the
Oceanic Tides and Atmospheric Circulation involve, but
these are reduced to comparative simplicity when the
former are regarded as chiefly secondary to the latter.

225. — The forces which produce Precession of the
Equinoxes, Secular Retardation, and the Atmospheric
Circulation, are undoubtedly those which produce the
Tides and Currents of the ocean, and it is equally certain
that these forces are centripetal force of gravitation di-
reoted to the Moon and Sun acting on the tangential mo-
tions of the Earth and its fluids in their orbits through
space about the tide producing orb, combined with cen-
tripetal force to the Earth and the Diurnal Rotation, the
combined centripetal and tangential forces of the orbit
giving rise to the force of 19 — 23, 54, Figs. 1 and 2 and
context, and thus bringing into action to produce the
tides, that which is effected by the diurnal rotation of
the globe and centripetal force of terrestrial gravity.
In short, the TIDAL FORCES ARE GRAVITATION TO
THE MOON, SUN, AND EARTH, ACTING ON THE TANGENTIAL
MOTIONS OF THE TERRESTRIAL ORBIT AND DIURNAL ROT-
ATION, or that is, the Centripetal and Tangential forces
acting mutually upon the solid Earth, and fluid air and
ocean, and the only question open to discussion is the
manner of their operations.

226. — In the matter of the tides, the Newtonian theory
has assigned, and as far as the writer can learn, all other
philosophers and writers dealing with the matter — Kepler
perhaps excepted — have assigned the tides to the centri-
petal force of the Tidal Orb as the only force producing
the tides, and that by acting directly upon and raising the
waters of the ocean by a force directed radially to the Earth
along the radius vector of the orbit. This is entirely or
almost entirely an erroneous view, certainly more so
jhan that of Prop. 66 Principia dealing with the motion
of the apsides and which led Newton to an error such
that " by omitting the consideration of the tangential
force (as he often does in the Principia when dealing
with force and motion) he calculated the amount at one

77

tialf its true value'1 an error since made manifest by
the results of observation.

227. — All force is motion, and all motion is force, and
there is no other force in the universe but motion.

228. — When two forces or motions or a motion and
force act in rectangular or tangential directions only a
portion of each appears in the diagonal of the parallelo-
gram of force or motion, and this is true of every paral-
lelogram resultant of two motions, two forces, or a force
and motion, and is a truth of the utmost importance in
dealing with orbital force and planetary motions.

229. — The tangential force of the Earth in the orbit has
been and is ever being both conferred and destroyed by
centripetal force to the companion or primary in a manner
such that at the expiration of the time occupied by a
quarter revolution in the orbit, the tangential motion or
force acting at the beginning has been destroyed, and
an equivalent amount in a rectangular direction been
produced, but at any given moment the tangential mo-
tion may be regarded as a force acting independent of,
and for circular orbits, acting rectangular to the centri-
petal force, but equally available to be drawn upon to
produce the phenomena of the Atmospheric Circulation,
Oceanic Tides, Precession of the Equinoxes, Secular Re-
tardation and Nutation, as is that of the centripetal force.

230. — The Newtonian philosophy has treated the tan-
gential force of a circular orbit, too much as a passive
and constant quantity neither increasing nor decreasing,
whereas as a matter of fact, as already indicated, the law
of a moving planet in a circular orbit is such that at any
moment the primary is removing and conferring
orbital motion or force in two rectangular directions
tangential and centripetal, that is, destroying force or
motion at right angles to the radius vector and conferring
force or motion along the radius vector respectively, an
exertion of force by the primary double that assigned to
the latter by the Principia, and the whole of which is re-
quired to deflect the motion of the planet in the orbit,
and to sustain it at a constant velocity, the result of the
motion lost and the motion gained by the planet being
that the planet moves in the curved orbit. By centri-
petal force alone, and in the absence of tangential motion
the planet would fall to the primary in 7Tl of the time taken
to complete a quarter revolution would fall (r)2 = 1U B>
which gives double the force available to produce the
tides to what is assigned by the Newtonian philosophy,
and divided into two rectangular directions under con-

7$

siderations of variation and perturbations on the rotating
Earth and the fluids of the enclosing fluid-sphere which
fully explain the tides, and also along: with this, the At-
mospheric Circulation, the Oceanic Circulation, and the
other kindred effects.

231. — Breaking away from all preconceived notions or
school boy views of the Tides as taught in the text books
and as illustrated by egg-shaped, or prolate spheroid fig-
ures of the ocean, all of which are radically unsound in
their treatment of the Tides, and breaking away from
the Equilibruim Theory of the Tides as tentatively con-
sidered and held; we may say that these must go in their
entirety. The theory of two oceanic tidal protuberances
forming the ends of an ellipsoid or prolate spheroid of
which the ends are two tidal crests with the ocean
waters always piled on these ends, this must go in its
entirety with respest to both form and kinetics. The
theory of the simultaneous formation and existence of two
oceanic tides or protuberances at opposite sides or oppo-
site ends of a diameter of the Earth must go. The theory
that there are two tides resting upon the Earth always
and simultaneously making and always and simulta-
neously dispersing must go, unless as simultaneously af-
fecting and producing the entire six tidal protuberances
or crests of the globe along with the corresponding
troughs which it appears to the writer is physically
impossible.

232. — In their origin the Tides have a trough origin at
the Galapagos alternating with a crest origin, and at in-
termediate phase there is no tidal protuberance upon the
globe anywhere, in the sense of the prolate spheroid
view, or of the view taken by the Equilibrium Theory of
the Tides, or of any view which. regards the Tides as due
to radial elevation of the waters to form the originating
crest, with an elevation in opposite hemispheres of the
globe.

233. — Both tides of the Tidal day originate on the Equa-
tor immediately around the Galapagos, that is, on the
Galapagos end of a diameter of the Earth emergent on
the Equator in west longitude 90°, and from this point
they are propagated to all parts of the world, originating
in this region at a definite time, travelling from this re-
gion to all parts of the ocean at a definite speed, deter-
mined by the depth of the ocean bed and contour of the
solid globe, along definite courses similarly determined,
and in a manner such, that at any moment, there are six
tidal troughs and six tidal crests of the ocean waters co-

79

existent upon the globe, which have originated at six
successive alternations of trough and crest phase
at the Galapagos, at six successive tidal intervals, each
interval comprehending a trough and crest origination,
at conjunctions and oppositions of the Pacific with the
Tidal Orb, in respect to the troughs, and at quadratures
of the Pacific with the Tidal Orb in respect to the crests.
That is, when the Tidal Orb (the Moon or anti-moon, or
Moon and Sun, or anti-moon and anti-sun combined) is
in longitude 180° then it produces trough phase of the
tides at Galapagos in longitude 90°, by withdrawing the
waters of the Pacific from this region under the forces
P E, G F of Figs. 1, 7, and 9. That is to say the forces
which develope the trough phase of the tides are at this
moment running strongest in the Pacific Oceanic Basin
and at this moment the Precessional and Secular Retar-
dation impact of the fluids of the air and ocean against
the solid Earth, more especially against the eastern
slopes of the Old World is running strongest. The actual
trough phase at the Galapagos occurs about two hours
after this at about & o'clock local-lunar-Galapagos-time
when the resulting momentums of the waters from east
to west has subsided and the waters commence to re-
turn from the eastern slopes of the Old World back to
the western slopes of the New to produce crest phase of
the Galapagos oscillation by the return of the waters,
which return produces the crest phase of the tides at the
Galapagos.

234. — Hence the whole question of the Tides of the
Ocean resolves itself into that of the cause of the radial
oscillation of the ocean waters at the Galapagos, the
transverse oscillation of the Tidal wave in respect to its
horizontal course in this region, that is, the polarised os-
cillation along a rectilineal axis of the Galapagos wave a
diameter of the Earth emergent in west longitude 90°.

235. — From the position of the cradle or source of the
tides at the Galapagos on the Equator, we must neces-
sarily conclude that the Tidal force or its resultant is
directed in the plane of the Equator, the plane of the
Earth's rotation, that of the Secular Retardation force;
and it is clear that they are due to the operation of this
force and the Earth's rotation and terrestrial gravitation.

236. — We must not forget that the trade winds con-
verge on the Equator and have their resultant in this
plane, that in force they represent half the entire Circu-
lation of the Atmosphere and in their resultant, as re-
presenting almost their entire force, are directed due

80

east to west, the other half of the Atmospheric Circula-
tion being almost entirely promiscuously directed with
almost as much westing as easting ; and that by acting
on the waves of the ocean which present to the winds a
great vertical sail area, and also by acting on the slopes
of the Tidal waves presented to their impact, that the
trade winds contribute to the Secular Retardation as is
manifested by their action piling up the ocean waters
against the eastern shores of the world and producing
the currents of these shores which flow polewards, at the
same time withdrawing waters from the western shores
of the world and producing currents which flow line-
wards along these shores. Hence any diurnal variation
in the force of the trade winds, tidally speaking, that is
with reference to the tidal day, if rhythmic to the tidal
intervals, that is, with a flow and ebb or increase and
decrease of east to west force ; necessarily this variation
of wind force must produce an alternate swing of the
Pacific Ocean alternately from east to west and west to
east, accompanied by a centrifugal force or rise of the
water level,directed from the Earth's centre on the east
to west or action swing, with a centripetal force or fall
of the water level,directed towards the Earth's centre on
the west to east or reaction return.

237. — Such a variation of the force of the trade winds
does exist, but more statistics are required before
attempting to demonstrate its existence in this treatise,
but it is absolutely and physically certain and necessary
that such a variation exist.

238. — The power of the winds to raise the level of the
ocean shores and to raise a Tidal crest on the enhanced
level, is manifested by the great increase in the height
of our own local tides in Britain when strong westerly
winds are blowing across the Atlantic on to our coasts,
a rise of level which greatly affects even our eastern
coasts, often producing on the river Tay a rise of several
feet above the proper or normal tide level especially at
spring tides.

239. — This rise of the tides by the action of the winds
is due to the pressure of the wind on the slope of the
tidal wave, towards which the wind is directed with a
component of pressure translating the waters in this di-
rection, steadily and slowly piling the waters up the in-
cline, the wind pressure against the sail area^f the tidal
slope with the aid of viscosity preventing the return of
the waters all the way to the lowest depths, and to the
wind pressure against the wind produced waves tiltecj

81

towards the wind on the windward or rear slope of the
tidal crest, and to the tidal wave moving over the
heightened level of the waters, a level which would be
increased by the westerly winds from the Atlantic,
even if no tidal wave existed.

240. — It is well known that in the Mediteranean where
tides are almost absent, a storm from the south-west can
raise the waters on certain shores of its northern coast
by about 5 feet.

241. — The power of the wind to remove water from a
coast is equally pronounced. In some cases violent
winds can produce a fall of the water in a harbour by
several fathoms, even to the extent of stranding ships,
which apart from the action of the wind usually ride
safely in the harbour in all states of the tide.

242. — If then, comparatively local winds, can raise the
waters of the ocean by several feet, what must be the
power of the Trade winds moving briskly in the Tidal
basin of the Pacific and pushing its waters over half the
circumferance of the globe, and acting to raise the
waters upon the eastern shores of the Old World ? Our
estimate of this power is 40 feet as the difference of
level of the Pacific Ocean at the Galapagos as compared
with that in the Phillipines, or at the Sunda Islands, the
former region possessing the lowest level.

243. — This 40 feet of head is ever ready to return the
waters in the direction of the Galapagos should the ve-
locity and pressure of the Trade winds relax, and if by a
semidiurnal variation of their force, in a Tidal interval,
this head is varying its height however slightly, this will
produce a movement of the Pacific waters alternately
directed en-masse from west to east, with a momentum
producing a compress of its waters at the Galapagos,
which will raise a tidal wave having its crest in this re-
gion, and from east to west, with a momentum with-
drawing waters from the Galapagos, which will produce
a tidal trough having its lowest level in this region, crest
and trough at the Galapagos synchronising with the
semi-diurnal variation of Trade wind force, or that is, of
its equatorial resultant. Whatever be the manner in
which Secular Retardation force produces a head of
water on the eastern coasts of the Old World, any varia-
tion of this force in a tidal interval affecting the height
of the head, will produce a Tidal oscillation on the
Galapagos and intermediate longitudes.

244. — Whatever view of the Tides or Tidal force we
take, the rhythmic tangential sway of the waters of the

ocean, more particularly of the Pacific Ocean, round the
equatorial circle of the globe alternately from east to
west and west to east, complete to-and-fro oscillations
in Tidal intervals, these tangential oscillations are the
cause of the tides, and the TRUE TIDES, originating
all the Tidal waves of the ocean which move over the
globe vibrating in vertical planes in directions trans-
verse to the surface, all of which Tidal waves or trans-
verse oscillations are subsidiary and secondary to the
true Tides the primary or the tangential oscillations of
the ocean waters under consideration.

245. — The equatorial tangential oscillations of the
waters of the Ocean the primary Tides must be regarded
as the Tidal force, and chiefly by their momentum, will
he determined the height of the tides on every shore in
the world.

246. — Thus at any moment there is upon the globe
tidal oscillations, (not a pair of crests separated by 180°
degrees of a great circle of the Earth such as the pro-
late theory or radial tidal force theory requires), these
tangential ones round the Equatorial circle of the Earth,
with swings alternately from east to west and west to
east, effected in either direction in a crest to trough in-
terval, i.e. one complete oscillation in the interval of
time elapsing between two successive tides, and tan-
gential oscillations of the waters of the Ocean are the
true Tides or Tidal force of the ocean, calling into exis-
tence and producing, all the crests and troughs of every
tidal wave, and the ebb and flow of the tides on every
shore.

247. — The tides of the ocean are undulations over its
surface, which in respect to each tidal wave and embrac-
ing crest and trough phase, cover 96° of geographical arc,
or that is a quarter of a lunar day of arc, while if pro
duced in pairs at opposite ends of a diameter of the
globe by tidal compress or centripetal forces of the
waters and fluids of the Earth directed over the Earth to
the line of conjunction and convergingly on to this line,
they would be tidal crests or protuberances separated
by 180° not 96° of geographical arc. The quadrantal
position of the tidal waves, (as against 180° if produced
in pairs) prove that they are not produced diametrically
but quadrantly.

248. — Whether produced secondarily to the Trade
winds and Atmospheric Circulation, or by direct action
to the Tidal Orb and tangential force of the Earth and
its fluids in the orbit acting and reacting along with the

8*

fiarth's rotation and terrestrial gravity, it appears clearly
and with all certainty to the writer, that the oceanic tidal
waves are produced by tangential sways of the ocean,more
particularly of the Pacific Ocean alternately from east to
west and west to east rhythmically in Tidal intervals
and that these tangential swings of the ocean
waters set up transverse undulations or radial
vibrations which constitute the tidal waves the crests
and troughs which cause the ebb and flow on every shore
affected by tidal impact, and that these transverse
movements are principally set up and originated on the
Equator, at the Galapagos, in west longitude 90°, in crest
phase at the Galapagos at the establishment of the tides
at 8 o'clock Greenwich time, 2 o'clock Galapagos time,
and in trough phase at the Galapagos at a quarter of a
lunar or Tidal-day from this, that is at 8 o'clock Galapa-
gos time, as given in 233, p. 79, and near Marshall's Is-
lands in longitude 180°; the great Pacific-Galapagos—
Marshall tangential swing being divided into two tidal
undulations or tidal waves, each of 90° of arc as embrac-
ing crest and trough phase, which tidal waves both in
their generation and progress are following the Moon
round the world in her daily course, and synchronating
also with her monthly progress, and though the ampli-
tude of the tidal waves greatly respects the position of
the Galapagos and Marshall's Islands, there is phase pro-
duction of increase or decrease at every stage of their pro-
gress round and over the world.

219. — We have thus reached the conclusion a conclu-
sion of the utmost importance, viz., that the Tidal force
is in its immediate operation, a tangential force, tangen-
tial to the Earth's circle ; in contradistinction to all pre-
vious views which have assigned the tides to a radial
force or resultant raising or converging the waters by
direct action on to the radius of the Earth's orbit about
the Tidal Orb.

250. — We assert that waters of the ocean converge or
flow into the plane of the Ecliptic, in company with air,
we assert that waters of the ocean converge or flow into
the Equator in company with air of the Trade Winds, and
this is a force which may play a part in the production
of the oceanic tides as it does in the oceanic circulation
as already set forth in this treatise, but all this said, we
conclude that the oscillations of the waters giving rise to
the Tidal wave or waves are forces acting tangentialTy
round the Earth with their resultant directed in the plane
of the Equator, a resultant acting alternately from east

84

to west and west to east in the manner given.

251. — If we assign the tidal troughs to the forces P 13,
G F of Fig. 1, i.e. to orbital force, then the crest phase of
the tides is due to reaction from this force as the ocean
waters of the Pacific or Tidal basin pass from conjunction
or opposition and come into quadrature with the Tidal
Orb in the diurnal rotation and the force P E or G F
ceases to act on the fluids the air and water of the Tidal
basin, and terrestrial gravity, acting on the displaced
waters, wholly or partially returns these to their normal
level, thereby producing a compress and elevation of the
waters on the western shores of America near the Gala-
pagos. When the Moon is directly over the Pacific in
longitude 180° in a position 90° west of the Galapagos, this
is conjunction of the Tidal basin, the Moon is then on
the horizon and setting at the Galapagos, and the tidal ebb
running strongest there, by withdrawal of the ocean
waters from that region. A quarter of a lunar or tidal
day later the waters return upon the Galapagos by ter-
restrial gravitation, and the tidal flow is now running
strongest in that region. Similarly if we follow the
Tidal basin round to the other side of the Earth to the
position of opposition with the Tidal Orb, all as illus-
trated in Figs. 7, 8, 9, 10, we have similar conse-
quences.

252. — The Galapagos is alternately the rear and front
end of a Pacific swing at trough and crest phase re-
spectively. This swing is a swing of the ocean waters
affecting 90° or 180° of the Pacific according to whether
we view the swing of the waters as one of 180° or sub-
divided into two of 90°. It is really the latter, so that
we may say that the Galapagos tidal wave, as of all other
tidal waves, is due mainly to the operation of a quad-
rantal force where direction alternates at intervals of a
quarter of a lunar or tidal day.

253. — In movements of water in a basin, and in tidal
effects, the sides of the basin and ends of the movement
always give the most powerful undulating or vibratory
results.

254. — The tidal force producing the Galapagos trough
is that of the Secular Retardation impact moving the air
and waters of the Paciffc bodily towards tha shores of
the Old World and piling the waters up in this direction,
while the tidal force producing the Galapagos crest is
that of terrestrial gravity returning the piled air and
waters to their normal level beyond which they rise as
the result of their returning momentum.

255. — Thus if we assign the tidal troughs of the ocean
as produced at the Galapagos and propagated from there
to all parts of the world, to centripetal force of the fluids
of the air and water to the Tidal Orb, then we must as-
sign the tidal crests to centripetal force of these to the
Earth's centre, and according to which of these forces is
prevailing in the Tidal basin, the w.iters at the Galapagos
are falling or rising. Thus centripetal force to the Tidal
Orb and tangential force in the orbit of the Earth about
the latter produce the tidal trough, centripetal force and
tangential force about the Earth called into action by the
diurnal rotation produce the tidal crests, and the alter-
nate prevailing of these two sets or pairs of forces,
produce the great Tidal - Basin - Tangential - Oscilla-
tions, and variation of level with respect to east and
west and west to east,the oscillations and variations which
are the true or primary tides giving rise to all other tidal
movements of the ocean as these proceed from the
various cradles of their movement, the regions passing
under the quadrantal forces, more especially from the
neighbourhood of: the Galapigos and Marshall's Islands.

256. — The tides proper, in iheir generation, are oscilla-
tions of the ocean in or about the Equator from East to
west and from wast to east, which raise tidal waves
which follow the rising and setting of the Moon and her
course round the globe, p.nd not a pair of prolate sphe-
roidal protuberances as the theories heretofore advanced
have supposed.

257. — The fact that the Atlantic, though it shows Secu-
lar-Retardation piling of its waters against the American
slopes with corresponding currents flowing polewards
along these shores, does not show any apparent tangen-
tial tidal oscillation, and no tide of its own generation, or
one entirely outweighed by that of the Pacific, this sug-
gests that the Atlantic swings with the solid Earth as
though it were part of the latter, and in the opposite di-
rection in space to the swing of the Pacific Ocean. The
solid globe and the Atlantic together form a mass whose
swing, though in momentum equal to that of the Pacific,
to that of the waters of the Tidal basin, to that of the
180° Tide, is through an arc relatively as small as
that of the Pacific mass of fluids is to the mass of the
solid Earth, or Earth and Atlantic combined. Hence if
the Atlantic oscillates with the continental or landward
protuberance of the globe, that is, with the solid Earth in
the tidal swing, it can have no appreciable tangential
swing, and thus no appreciable tidal generation, and so

af

there will be no tide originated in the Atlantic basin,
and no tides, except the tidal waves received from the
Pacific in respect to the 180° tidal swing.

258. — The passivity of the Atlantic in the matter of
tide production, and receiving all its tidal waves from
the Pacific, indicates that the tidal waves are pro-
duced by the swings of the Pacific fluids and not those of
the Atlantic.

259. — In the tidal swing, that of the primary tide, we
place the solid globe and the Atlantic fluids on one side
and call their momentum M, ou the other side we place
the Pacific fluids, the air and water of the Tidal basin,
and call their momentum M/, then at all times M=M/,
these momentums are at all times oppositely directed,
and each act alternately from east to west and west to
east. While the momentums are equal the velocities are
very unequal, the velocity of M is inappreciable, while
that of M' is an east to west rush of all the fluids of the
Tidal basin aiding to produce the Secular Retardation
and the chief factor of the latter.

260. — In the tidal swing, the solid globe and Atlantic
move together through an unappreciable arc, the Pacific
waters alone acquire a velocity sufficient for tidal
generation.

261. — We must reiterate. In the principle tide, the
mass on the one side is the entire globe only excepting
the fluids of the one hemisphere in what may be termed
ihe Pacific or Tidal basin, the mass on the other side are
the fluids of the Tidal basin, and the tidal oscillation is
called into existence by the rotation of the globe causing
the Tidal Orb to alternately quicken and slowing the fluids
of the Tidal basin in the orbit about the Tidal Orb,
quickening their movement in the orbit at the con-
junctions, Fig. 7, slowing their movement at the oppo-
sitions Fig. 9, by the forces P E, G F of Fig. 1 respec-
tively, acting on the fluids of the Tidal or Pacific basin,
and the solid Earth though quickened and slowed by
equal amount in momentum at opposition and conjunction
with the Tidal basin and Tidal Orb, may be regarded as
moving through space without change of velocity in the
Tidal swing, though to be absolutely correct there is a
slight semi-diurnal change of velocity in the orbit at the
different tidal hours of the principle tide even for the solid
Earth, but the change of velocity is always in opposite
directions to that of the fluids of the Pacific basin, the
combined effects giving rise to the principle /Tidal
swing or primary tide.

87

262. — There have been so many hazy views regarding
the tides and in so many quarters, that we must continue
to reiterate in order to make our own views and concep-
tions quite clear to the reader. Could the observer see
the movements of the primary tide, he would discover
that at every point of the oscillation the movement of the
water is directed round the Earth horizontally at each
point of observation, so that it may be regarded as a
horizontal movement of the waters and not a vertical
evcept in so far as the horizontal movement checked and
reversed in its course calls up the latter. The horizontal
movement of the water is making impact against the
slopes of the solid Earth, and against its own unmoved
mass and inertia which have not taken up the movement,
an impact alternately from east to west producing Secu-
lar Retardation, and a recoil from this directed from
west to east producing the impact against the western
slopes of America which at the Galapagos developes a
tidal wave, the latter a transverse or radial movement,
thus the tidal wave is developed by recoil of the fluids
from the Secular Retardation impact. That is, the tidal
wave regarded as produced at the Galapagos, as the
cradle of its origin is developed by recoil or reaction of
the fluids of the Tidal basin, but later on in connection
with Figs, and context, we shall show that east to west
impact aids the tidal crest of longitude 186° W. where
the tides synch ronate alike in phase with those of the
Galapagos.

263. — The fluids move over the Pacific basin piling the
waters against the Old World, producing Secular Re-
tardation, a movement greater on the fluids of the at-
mosphere which have extension and mobility, bnt a
movement affecting directly and kinetically all those
waters of the Pacific which are protuberant or external
to a tangent to the circle of the ocean bed, and by con-
tact and viscosity; affecting the waters to thoir entire
depths, thus piling up the waters against the Old World,
but the return of the waters from west to east under
terrestrial gravitation, when the Secular Retardation
force is withdrawn at the quadratures, is a movement of
momentum and pressure directed in greater force along
the bottom of the ocean, so that the waters well up at
the Galapagos in a movement directed radially.

264. — Thus the tangential oscillation of the Pacific
Ocean is accompanied by vertical movements of the
ocean waters in which the water is descending on the
eastern shores of the Old World, and ascending on the

88

western shores of the New World with a variable force
at different tidal hours, so that the ocean at the Galapa-
gos alternately rises and falls in a tidal interval develop-
ing a tidal wave which passes over the ocean to all parts
of the world. The movement of the Pacific waters
strongest along the bottom directed from west lo east,
developes a compress an impact and a fountain or lifting
force at the Galapagos of sufficient momentum and force
to raise the tidal wave, which marks a never ceasing;
effort of the waters to find their level as a position of rest.
At the conjunctions of the tidal wave, the waters
are thrown into horizontal movement from east to west,
and from the eastern coasts flow away polewards, at the
quadratures they return with an impact focussing on the
American slopes dipping into the Pacific around the
Galapagos, these slopes as they are elevated to form the
American continents, damming back the return of the
waters and preventing their flow into the Atlantic, thus
raising the crest of the tidal wave, and by means of
which the effects are shared by the whole ocean.

265. — The momentum of the west to east Galapagos
impact of the fluids the air and water of the Tidal basin
is to be measured by the energy of the resulting tidal
waves, an energy developing thermal motion and radia-
tion; and dissipating a reaction equal to the tidal return
of that force whose action is measured by Precession and
Secular Retardation, in an equation in which action and
reaction are equal.

266. — Thus the oceanic tides are in the main and re-
garded as dispersing their own energy, due to the re-
action of the ocean waters from the Secular Retardation
impact, a reaction brought into play by the Earth's ro-
tation and opposed by the continental dams, that of the
landward protuberance of the globe, but which dam also
opposes the action which produces the Secular Retarda-
tion.

267. — If we regard the Pacific Ocean in respect to the
fluids of the Tidal basin as these move in the action and
reaction of Secular Retardation, and call the action a
force, action in relation to the conjunctions and opposi-
tions of the Tidal basin with the Tidal Orb, reaction in
relation to the quadratures of the Tidal basin with the
Tidal Orb, then these forces synchroniously and simul-
taneously raise a tidal crest on the Equator at the Gala-
pagos in longitude W. 90° and a similar crest in longitude
W. 180, that is two tidal crests at quadrantal positions to
each other in the same hemisphere, and as the Earth ro-

tates in the diurnal rotation while these crests are sus-
tained in the Tidal basin by the forces of action and re-
action they move from east to west across the Pacific
that is across the Tidal basin, and were we to assign
Secular Retardation to a tidal brake, which we do not in
the ordinary sense of the term, these are the crests whose
pressure would exert the tidal brake. We assign both
Precession and Secular Retardation to actual impact of
the fluids of the Earth, especially those of the Tidal basin
as these fluids are moved across the Earth by the forces
P E, G F of Fig. 1, acting on the fluids of the air and
ocean, modified by the Earth's rotation ; we assign Nu-
tation to these forces modified by gravitation of the Sun
and Moon upon a protuberant equator of the Earth, (a
force which acting alone on the rotating Earth would
speedily remove the obliquity as its only action) and we
assign the Tides to these forces modified by the eccen-
tric positionof the Ocean. If the water and land were in
balanced symmetrical proportion all round the globe, or
even approximately so with respect to longitude, the
oceanic tides would largely if not entirely cease to exist,
but the Atmospheric Circulation (especially that pro-
ducing the semi-diurnal barometrical maximums and
minimums and the trade-winds and anti-trades) Preces-
sion of the Equinoxes, Secular Retardation, and Nuta-
tion would still go on, but under greatly modified and
less accentuated conditions.

268. — Bef erring now to Figs. 7, 8, 9, and 10, we reach the
startling generalization that the Qceanio Tides are due in the
main to tho eccentric position of the fluids ef the glole} that is of
the air and water referred to the centre of gravity of their entire
mass; which is eccentrically situated upon the side of the globe
occupied ly the Pacific 0cean.

269.— Referring to Figs. 7, 8, 9 and 10, P E, G F, may
be regarded as the forces P E, G F, of Fig. 1, p. 44,which
were shown to have a tangential component along P D,
and LF, i.e. round the Earth from ecliptic east to ecliptic
west, and a vertical component along C E and C G re-
spectively. To the two rectangular components of the
former we assign Precession and Secular Retardation
respectively, to the latter we assign the vertical oscilla-
tions of the Oceanic Tides, those transverse to the sur-
face, as giving the energies which produce the effects.

270.— Referring to Fig. 1, p. 44, and regarding the
crescent shaped segments K E H D and B G K L respec-
tively, as the Pacific Ocean or waters of the Tidal Basin
at two positions a semi-lunar or semi-tidal day apart, and

regarding the Figure D H L K as representing the rotat-
ing Earth. Let the centre of gravity of the fluids
K E H D be situated in C E at a point near E. Initially
let E be at the 6 a.m. position near K, and the crescent
K E H D in quadrature with M, then in passing from K
to H round the arc of rotation K D H. that is from the
6 a.m. to the 6 p.m. position in respect to the orb M, the
waters are losing time in the daily rotation, arid so when
the solid globe has rotated through 12 honrs the waters
now near quadrature with M on the side H have rotated
through a little less. Again, as the segment of fluids or
waters of the Tidal Basin pass from H to K that is from
the 6 p.m. to the 6 a.m. position, they are again losing
time by the action of the component of the force L F —
G F directed along L F. Thus at all times, unless when
exactly at quadrature with the orb M, the oceanic waters
of the Tidal Basin are losing time in the daily rotation
developing a movement of the ocean waters from east to
west but in tho greatest degree when the waters are
directly under the tide raising orb or orbs. This loss of
time by the ocean waters making impact against the
rotating Earth appears as Secular Retardation.

271.— Passing now to Figs. 7, 8, 9, and 10, whieh dia-
gramatically illustrate the same things. P E, G F of
these Figs, represent the forces shown in Fig. 1, p. 44,
the Precessional, Secular Betardational, Nutational, and
Tidal forces Let X be the centre of gravity of the ex-
cess of fluids of the Tidal Basin and represent their mass
over the amount of fluids upon the opposite side of the
globe. Then in Fig. 7, the mass is moving faster in the
orbit than the Earth's centre; in Fig. 8, X posseses the
same velocity as the Earth's centre ; in Fig. 9 X is mov-
ing in the orbit slower than the Earth's centre; in Fig.10
X airain moves in the orbit at the same velocity as the
Earth's centre, about the Moon or Tidal Orb M ; where
O T represents a portion of the Earth's orbit about the
Moon or i. e. about the Tidal Orb M, and ZN a portion
of the Moon's orbit about the Earth ; of course not to
scale nor curvature, but only agreeable to relative direc-
tions pursued, the revolutions of the two bodies about
each other being approximately from west to east. In
Fig. 7, tiie Pacific ocean waters or centre of the Tidal
Basin B B, by losing time in the greatest degree and
moving along the direction P E, and with a vertical com-
ponent of motion along the direction G R V, are being
withdrawn from the Galapagos from near G, from 90°
W. Longitude, and so ebb tide is now moving fastest in

92

this region, the time being about 6 p.m. at the Galapagos,
referred to the Tidal Orb M, which may be regarded as
both the Moon and Sun if the Figs. 7, 8, 9, and 10 be
taken at the establishment of the tides, and about 2 hours
past this position of the quadrature of the Galapagos G
or 90° W with the Tidal Orb M, it will be slack water on
the ebb tide in this region, a phase which will be trans-
mitted successively round the Tidal Basin from east to
west as the Earth by further rotation comes into the po-
sition of Fig. 8. In Fig. 8 the component of the force
P E directed along B V has ceased to act, and also that
directed from east to west, in short, the whole force P E
in respect to the centre of gravity X of the fluids of the
Tidal Basin B B has ceased to act, and the waters return
upon the Earth by terrestrial gravitation and reaction,
as shown by the radial arrows directed inwards towards
O in the waters B B and solid Earth O W, the ocean and
Earth which had been partially separated now seeking
one another and the waters seeking their normal level
under the influence of terrestrial gravity. Thus in Fig.
7 the waters move centrifugally-radially along O R V, and
tangentially east to west along G D J by action at the con-
junction of the Tidal Basin B B with the Tidal Orb M
withdrawing the waters from the Galapagos and giving
rise to trough phase there, while, in Fig. 8, as shown,they
move centripetally-radially along X C, and tangentially-
radially from west to east along H D G by reaction at the
quadrature of the Tidal Basin B B with the Tidal Orb M
and thus pile upon the Galapagos near G,and acquire crest
phase in the region of 90° W. longitude, the flow tide mo-
ving fastest at the Galapagos or that is in the region of
90° W. in the position of Fig. 8, at local time about 12
o'clock at the establishment of the tides, and it is slack
water on the flow tide about 2 hours after this at the
Galapagos at 2 o'clock local time; and from the Galapagos,
the crest phase produced in this region is radiated and
transmitted to every part of the Ocean. In Fig, 9 similar
conditions prevail to those of Fig. 7 by the operation of
the force G F acting on the waters of the Tidal Basin
B B, and the force P E acting on the solid globe WW,
producing at the Galapagos or i.e in long. 90° W.
similar conditions to those of Fig. 7, by the tangential
component of the force G F directed from east to west,
and the vertical component of the force G F directed
away fromO upon the waters of the Tidal Basin BB. Thus
in Fig. 9 the ocean waters are again losing tim3 in the
greatest degree and are being tangentially and radially

Withdrawn £rom the Galapagos, again producing trough
phase of the tides in this region, slack water on the ebb
tide occuring at 8 a.m. Galapagos time. In Fig. 10 the
force G F ceases to act, and as with Fig. 8, the waters
again raturn upon the Galapagos upon the region of 90°
W. long, and flowing produce crest phase in this region
by the operation of reaction and terrestrial gravity.

272. — Thus we have seen that consequent upon the
eccentric position of the fluids of the globe, and of their
centre of mass and gravity (and this refers to the air as
well as the water of the Tidal Basin BB, vide Figs. 7, 8, 9,
and 10) the oeean waters are varying their velocity
through space, moving en-masse alternately faster and
slower than the solid Earth ; that both the increase of
velocity of the orbital motion when outrunning the solid
Earth and the decrease of velocity when falling behind
the solid Earth in the orbit, moves the waters round the
Earth from ecliptic east to ecliptic west, with a compo-
nent of motion from east to west, and causing the waters
to lose time in the rotation; and to make Secular Retar-
dation impact with the rotating Earth. In respect to
the atmosphere, to the extent to which the air is eccen-
trically placed on the side of the Tidal Basin, and with
regard to its variation of velocity in the orbit through
space, alternately outrunning and falling behind the solid
Earth, this is a force acting to make the atmosphere lose
time in the rotation, and the air to move from east to
west generating trade winds, and the easting thereof,
and making Precessional and Secular Retardation impact
against the rotating globe, by acting on the sail area of
the oceanic waves both tidal and wind produced, and the
land projections of the Earth, the movements ef the
fluids air and water from east to west, both contributing
to the whole amount of Precession, Secular Retardation
Nutation, and Tidal force.

273. — The exact ratio of the oceanic and atmospheric
motions under the forces P E, G F of Fig. 1, in the phe-
nomena of Precession, Secular Retardation, Nutation,
and the Tides, can only be determined when the qualita-
tive aspects of the question as set forth in this treatise
have been fully recognised ; and since in dealiug quanti-
tatively with the subjects, under false premises, there
has already been so much misapplication of mathematics
and so many absurd inferences, and so many crudities
propounded, we must be very careful in accepting so-
called mathematical conclusions. In this question of
Precession, Secular Retardation, Nutation, Atmospheric

14

and Oceanic Circulation; and the Tides, acute percep-
tions, common sense, and ordinary mechanics, must have
the first place, then, when a proper judgment is formed
and proper estimates of cause and effect are made, and
all in their proper relation, then mathematicians aud
mathematics may be called in to finish the process, and
apply the results.

274. — All force or motion, is motion in continuation.
Thus if we take the end of a rope in our hand, and by^. a
motion of our arms, throw it into a series of waves, all
these waves have been derived from the point of applica-
tion of the motion of our arm, which motion of the arm
has been derived from that of the molecules or par-
ticles of food we eat, and air we breathe, derived in con-
tinuation from the illimitable energies of the universe.
Similarly the tidal waves are motions of continuation de-
rived as it were from a moving arm, the en-masse tangen-
tial and radial oscillation of the Pacific Ocean or for that
matter of the entire ocean, in respect to its eccentric po-
sition on the Earth as diagramatically represented in
Figs. 7, 8, 9 and 10, and the region of the Galapagos is
the point of application, the end of the Tidal- wave-rope,
from which the force of motion of the oceanic arm as it
moves to-and-fro tangentially and radially in its accelar-
ation and retardation in space with respect to the move-
ment of the solid globe, is transmitted and radiated from
crest to crest and trough to trough of the series of Tidal
waves in a manner exactly analagous to the transmission
of waves along a rope, and in which trough and crest
may be taken to represent equal forces, and in which the
Galapagos may be regarded as the point of application of
the force of the oceanic oscillation or tidal arm. Thus we
must not assign the tidal waves to that of the Galapagos
regarded as a reservoir of force formed there and then
dispersing, but rather regard the tangential and radial
oscillation of the Pacific or ocean waters in their entire
mass as the arm or reservoir of force, but operating from
the Galapagos as the end of the tidal wave system, or
centre of radiation from which all the tidal waves are
transmitted ; as the point of attachment as it were of the
series of tidal waves to that motion or force of the entire
ocean which produces them, a force or motion, as with
the rope, passing from wave to wave, from crest to crest,
and trough to trough, by mutual contact and im-
pact, all along the entire course of the tidal waves, so
that the whole,embracmg six crests and six troughs,four
of which are distributed quadraiitly about the equator,

95

are vibrating seri-sychroniously as one system with ab-
sorption of force or motion and wave production at
every point of the system. But in producing a wave on
a rope, a to-and-fro motion is required, and equally with
the oceanic tidal waves a to-and-fro motion must be
needed to initiate, produce, and sustain them, and this
we have shown to exist both tangentially and radially in
respect to the conjunctions and quadratures of the fluid
extension of the Pacific with the Tidal Orb, The dimen-
sions of the tidal waves and the energies of movement of
the tidal system, are such as only to consist with a tan-
gential and radial oscillation of the entire mass of the
ocean as the motion or force which originates, produces,
and sustains them, arising from the action of P E and
G F of Fig. 1 and context, that is of orbital force, and
this force has been shown to possess tangential and radial
components, which we estimate possess an energy equal to
that of all the phenomena which we have assigned to
them, including the energies of the ocean tides, and to
which alone the latter appear to be due.

275. — Given a variation of eak to west trade wind
force in a semi-lunar day or tidal interval, synchronatin^;
with the ebb and flow of the tides in their origin, as
there certainly is, there is also a variation of meridional
force so that the ocean waters are alternately blown or
compressed into the equator increasing its protuberance
and retire decreasing its protuberance. This variation
of wind force will stand related to the position of the
barometrical maximums K and L of Figs. 4, 7, 8, 9 and
10, and will act to modify the height of the tides.

276. — In their entire aspect and bifurcation the
oceanic tides are variously produced, and affected by
many modifications almost as complicated as those which
affect the weather ; barometric variations and fluctuations
of the winds, more especially the equatorial-semi-diurnal
barometric variation, and geographical conditions, play a
very important part in the producing of the tides, but
amid all the variety of movement, we see Precession of
the Equinoxes, Secular Retardation, Nutation, Trade-
winds, and Anti-trades, the principle Oceanic Currents,
and the clock work regularity of the Tides, standing out
clearly as average results of the orbital forces which
produce the Tides. Precession never ceases, Secular
Retardation never ceases, Nutation is now to one side,
now to another, but possesses an average result which
may be predicted, the Oceanic Tides vary in height but
flow regularly in definite times but under conditions

96

which may for the most part be predicted, the Oceanic
Currents affect definite courses which may for the most
part be observed, charted, and predicted, and the aver-
age movements of the Atmosphere if we could only gauge
them, are almost as regular as those of all the other
phenomena named; all the phenomena just named arising
from one common cause viz. Orbital Force under the oper-
ation of the primary movements of the Earth, Moon and
Sun through space, and their mutual gravitations, and
if we had the power to properly apply orbital force and
gravitation to all the conditions, we could predict every
effect both seasonal and local. But the first step to any
real advance in meteorological science of any service
must be the total abandonment of that theory which
assigns the Atmospheric Circulation to thermal convec-
tion, and the recognition of the views of this treatise,
which regard the Atmospheric Circulation as due to
gravitation of the Sun, Moon, and Earth,acting directly
on the fluids of the atmosphere, chiefly through the
medium of the orbital motions in space their perturb-
ations, and the Earth's rotation, and without the aid of
thermal convection. This may be a doctrine as un-
pleasant to the present school of learned men, and to
their pet societies, as the announcements of Copernicus
accepting the Pythagorean views that the Earth turned
round, and of his own views that it moved round the
Sun in contradistinction to the views then prevailing
that the Earth stood still, were to the schools of
his day, but it is a doctrine as necessary just now to
the progress of science, as were the views of Copernicus
in his time, and calculated to dispense with many crudi-
ties which have done duty as science for much too long
a time, and that in the very highest quarters.

277. — In 140, p. 34, we proposed to demonstrate that
Cor. 20, Prop. 66, book 1, Principia, is absurd, and now
proceed to do so. This Cor. and context declares that
Precession is due to gravitation of the Sun and Moon
acting on a rotating protuberant equator of the Earth's
solid globe.

PROPOSITION 1.

278. — The action of solar and lunar gravitation upon
the rotating solid protuberant equator of the Earth, or the
mutual actions of these forces and the diurnal rotation,
cannot produce a movement of the nodes of the terres-
trial equator, unless annual and lunational nutations
of equal force in opposite directions possessing no Preces-
sional displacement or resultant, and so cannot produce

97

Precession of the Equinoxes, and to suppose that the
action of solar and lunar gravitation upon the rotating
solid protuberant equator or the mutual actions of the
gravitations and the rotation upon the solid protuberant
equator, do produce the Precession of the equinoxes, is
absurd. In Fig. 2, p. 47, let W D E V be the rotating pro-
tuberant equator of the solid Earth, N C S the polar axis,
D C V and WOE rectangular diameters of the Earth
in the plane of the protuberant equator, and in rect-
angular meridian planes, or that is, in the planes of the
solstitial colures N D S V and E N W S respectively, then
N C S, WOE, and DCV are rectangular to one an-
other. Let the Sun move relatively round the Earth
in the orbit K D L V denominated the plane of the Eclip-
tic, and in the direction or order of these letters, with
D the ascending node of the Sun passing north at the
vernal equinox, and V the descending node of the Snn
passing south at the autumnal equinox. Let the Sun
be in the summer solstice in C L produced or at the
winter solstice in C K produced ; then the resultant of
gravitation of the orb on the protuberant solid equator is
in the solstitial plane E N W S, and in this direction, and
so by acting on the protuberant equator, whether the
equator be stationary, rotating at intermediate speeds,
or rotating at an infinite velocity, by the second law of
motion, as given in th.3 Principia itself, the Sun can only
act on the protuberant solid equator to reduce the angle
B C E or i.e. N C P or i.e. the obliquity of the ecliptic.
But if we take the orb at any intermediate declination of
either the northern or southern hemisphere of the Earth,
then during the transit of either hemisphere ; within the
limits of the altitude attained 23°27'in the case under con-
sideration twice during the transit of either hemisphere,the
orb comes to any given declination, and at equal distan-
ces upon opposite sides of the solstitial meridian or col-
ure, (though if the distances do vary slightly it does
not affect the conclusions of the argument) and though
there is nutation of the Earth's axis and nodes in Pre-
cession and declination for intermediate declinations of
the contiguous quadrants, yet the two nutational deflec-
tions for the two members respectively of each pair of
declinations for opposite sides of the solstitial meridian
or colure, are equal and oppositely directed each to each,
and when a whole transit or whole passage of the orb
from node to node, that is from D to V or V to D of the
figure is considered, there is no Nutation either in Pre-
cession or latitude but only outstanding deflection

98

of the plane of the protuberant equator in the one direc-
tion viz. EN WS, and a corresponding reduction of the
angle of obliquity L C E or i.e, N C P ; and a removal of
the obliquity of ihc ecliptic exactly proportionate to the
energy of the force E N W S regarded as the resultant of
the entire action of the Sun for a whole year or revolu-
tion. When a whole passage of the orb from node to
node is taken, the mean of the force of gravitation
of the orb on the solid protuberant equator and embrac-
ing that for every possible pair of declinations, is in the
solstitial meridional plane, and so for a whole revolution
of the orb, the whole resultant force of gravitation of the
orb on the protuberant solid equator acts in the solstitial
meridional, or i.e. the solstitial colure plane, and in the
direction EN W S, and thus we may consider the whole
force in respect to its effects upon the solid protuberant
equator or ring, as a force in this plane, and as just stated
it is a force acting to rotate the Earth in the direction
E N W S on the nodal line or axis D C V, and so only act-
ing to reduce the angle N C P, or that is the obliquity of
the ecliptic, and there is no other action in respect to
gravitation of the orb on the protuberant solid equator.
If we regard Precession of the Equinoxes as a rota-
tion of the Earth in the plane N D S V, and in this direc-
tion, and that the force of gravitation of the orb acting
on the protuberant solid equator is in the plane and di-
rection E N W S rectangular to N D S V as just shown to
be ; then the diurnal rotation W D E V,together with that
by reason of the protuberant equator and solar gravita-
tion E N W S, being in planes rectangular to that of the
rotation N D S V, it follows, that E N W S and W D E V
cannot produce the Precession, for it is impossible for a
force or motion to produce a motion rectangular to itself
without an intervening or assisting medium or force,
and so for two rectangular forces or motions to produce
a third motion rectangular to both. But on the other
hand, if we regard Precession as a rotation of the Earth
in the plane and direction L D K V, i.e. in the ecliptic
plane on the ecliptic axis PGA, and displacing the nodes
D and V in a retrograde direction in this plane, while
preserving the angle of obliquity N C P constant ; then
this rotation also is rectangular to E N W S, and so the
latter acting alone can contribute no share of the dis-
placement of the nodes constituting Precession. Again,
the force of Precession L D K V can be resolved into the
forces L W i.e. E D W V directed against the diurnal ro-
tation, and L X i.e. N D S V rectangular to both N W SE

99

and the diurnal rotation, then L X or i.e. N D 8 V is rec-
tangular to both W D E V and E N W S, while LW or i.e.
E D W V is rectangular to E N W S and directly opposed
to W D E V, therefore, as before, E N W S and W D E V
acting on a protuberant solid equator cannot produce
the rotation of the Earth L D K V or displacement of the
nodes D and V constituting Precession of the Equinoxes,
or if we say that they do, then we say that a force can
produce a motion directed against itself without the aid
of recoil or any other impact or force, and also that a
force acting in one plane can produce a motion in a plane
rectangular to that of its action without an intermediate
or assisting agency or force, both of which declarations
are contrary to the laws of motion and absurd, therefore
E N W S and W D E V acting in combination cannot pro-
duce Precession of the nodes, that is of the Equinoxes,
and to assert that they do so is absurd. The proof that
the Moon cannot produce Precession of the Equinoxes
is the same or similar to that for the Sun, but substitut-
ing the word Moon for Sun, aud lunar stice for solstice,
therefore the assertion that the Sun and Moon by their
gravitation on the rotating protuberant equator of the
solid Earth produces the Precession of the Equinoxes is
absurd; wherefore, Cor. 20. Prop. 66, book 1, Principia
is absurd. Q.E.D.

Cor. 1. Since the obliquity of the ecliptic is not re-
moved but remains practically constant, there is another
force equal to that of gravitation of the Sun on the pro-
tuberant solid equator but acting in the contrary direc-
tion i.e. acting in the solstitial colure in the direction
W N E S, where these letters indicate the poles and car-
dinal points respectively, as illustrated in Fig. 2, p. 47.

Cor. 2. There is a force acting in the plane and direc-
tion N D S V N i.e. in that of the equinoctial colure to
rotate the Earth on the cardinal diameter W C E, and
this force is other than that of gravitation of the Sun and
Moon acting on the protuberant solid equator of the
Earth, and rectangular thereto, being in a plane rectang-
ular to that of the action on the protuberant equator.

Cor. 3. Gravitation of the Sun and Moon on a protub-
erant solid equator acting in the direction E N W S E
limits the action of the force WN E S of Cor. 1.

Cor. 4. A force L D K V besides giving the component
NDSV of Precession of the Equinoxes would pos-
sess a larger component E D W V giving Secular
Retardation.

Cor. 5. The force L D K V is an impact of fluids.

Cor. 6. Lateral pressure of Fluids moving against ihe
rotating Earth,or along LDKV,acting meridionally on the
protuberant solid equator would give the force of Cor.l.
Cor. 7. The impact of fluids L D K V is due to nutations
of the Earth and its fluids in the orbit about the Sun and
Moon, and is produced by the primary motion and cen-
tripetal force of gravitation to these bodies.

Cor. 8. Nutation is due to intervariation of all the
forces under consideration, with special reference to the
change of plane of the lunar orbit and points of impact
of the fluids with the rotating Earth and protuberant
equator.

Cor. 9. The forces of Precession, Nutation, and Secu-
lar Retardation in their energy and as maintained and
perpetuated in their operation, are kinetic, consisting of
fluid motion of air and water under the tangential force
of the Earth knd its fluids in the orbit and recoil from the
Earth's rotation, and of the centrifugal forces of gravity
directed to the Moon, Sun, and Earth.

Cor. 10. The kinetic resultant of the motion of the
fluids of the atmosphere and ocean and embracing the
sum of the actions and reactions in relation to the rota-
tion of the Earth and orbital motions of the Earth about
the Moon and Sun, however much the force may vary
geographically and quadrantly in the diurnal rotation, is
constantly directed round the Earth in the plane of the
orbit from orbital-plane-east to orbital-plane-west, i.e. in
the direction approximately L D K V L of Fig. 2 in re-
spect to action, and in the reverse direction in respect to
recoil of the fluids or reaction.

Cor. 11. The whole force urging the atmosphere and
ocean in the direction L D K V L at any given moment is
proportionate to that of Precession, Nutation, and Secular
Retardation, regarded as one phenomenon.

N.B. The second law of motion as given in the Prin-
clpia and Cor. 20, prop. 66, book 1, Principia, cannot both
be true.

279. — Sir Isaac Newton, Principia, Book III. in h: !
" Rules of Reasoning in Philosophy" says

RULE 1.

" WE ARE TO ADMIT NO MORE CAUSES OF NATURAL THINGS
THAN SUCH AS ARE BOTH TRUE AND SUFFICIENT TO EXPLAIN

THEIR APPEARANCE. " " To this purpose the philosophers
say that nature does nothing in vain, aud more is vain
when less will serve ; for nature is pleased with sim-
plicity and affects iiofc the pomp of superfluous causes/'
280. We think that Newton in his love of simplicity

ioi

arid under the domination of the thought that " more is
vain when less will serve," and in his desire to reject
" superfluous causes'" of ten omitted much from his equa-
tions and demonstrations which was needed to render
them complete and " sufficient to explain appearances,"
while many of his conclusions are not only faulty, but
absolutely untenable and false. " There are crooked
things which cannot be made straighfand there are com-
plicated things that cannot be made simple, and what
nature does love is variety rather than simplicity, and
while not affecting pomp, she is magnificent in her parts
without affectation, but all in harmonious concord and
without confusion.

281. — The Tides of the ocean at once present our view
with complications and concord, and under conditions
which cannot be reduced to a few simple propositions
and tenets, such as those of the school and text books,
and even such as those of the views of Sir Isaac Newton
himself as given in the Principia, and upon which the
former are based. But according to rule iv. Principia,

" IN EXPERIMENTAL PHILOSOPHY WE AEE TO LOOK UPON PRO-
POSITIONS COLLECTED BY GENERAL INDUCTION FROM PHEN-
OMENA AS ACCURATELY OR VERY NEARLY TRUE, NOTWITH-
STANDING ANY CONTRARY HYPOTHESIS THAT MAY BE IMAGINED
TILL SUCH TIME AS OTHER PHENOMENA OCCUR BY WHICH THEY
MAY BE MADE MORE ACCURATE, OR LIABLE TO EXCEPTIONS.

This rule we must follow, that the argument of induction
may not be evaded by hypotheses."

282. — Observations of the tides have multiplied since
Sir Isaac Newton's time to such an extent, that these
observations present us with results which may be de-
nominated " experimental" nature herself performing
the experiments, with the solar system as her laboratory,
and the Earth and ocean her apparatus. The view of the
Tides in the Principia must now be regarded as the hy-
pothetical one, and though advanced by Newton, it must
not be allowed to evade the arguments of inductions
which can now be made from a vastly greater body of
observations than those at the command of Newton.
The hypotheses of Newton with regard to the tides, and
for that matter his hypotheses generally, must be only
regarded as stepping stones to better views. Of his four
" Rules of Reasoning in Philosophy" prefatory to Book
III. Principia, only Rule ii. can be admitted without ser-
ious reservations and qualifications either with regard
to the rules themselves or the appended illustrations
and remarks.

102

283. — Reasoning by induction from observations of the
Tides as recorded in Tide-Tables and shown by the lines
of a co-tidal chart, the following propositions " collected
by general induction from the phenomena" appaar to be
accurately or very nearly true, viz.

Prop. 2.

The Oceanic Tides are in the main due to notion, and
re-action of the fluids of the Ocean or Tidal Basin, air and
water, as these move in the Secular Retardation impact
from east to west at the conjunctions and oppositions of
the air and water with the Tidal Orb produced by the
diurnal rotation of the Earth ; and return or react from
west to east at the quadratures or morning and evening
positions of the air and water to the tidal orb.

Prop. 3.

There is in general a diurnal tide due to the operation
of the Precessional component of the Precessional Secular
Betardational impact,operating over the Pacific and At-
lantic,alternately ascendingly and descendingly, the as-
cending and descending resultants being separated by
a semi-lunar or i.e. a semi-tidal day. The ascending
component of the fluid motion; that of the air and water;
increases the tides on the shores of Britain, the descend-
ing component decreases the tides on the shores of
Britain, and by a law such, that in winter the morning
tides are under the ascending component in respect to
the influence of the Sun, and the evening tides are under
the descending component in respect to the influence of
the Sun, aud so the morning tides average higher than
the evening tides. In Fig. 2, p. 47, N D S is the des-
cending component, and S V N the ascending component
of the Precessional - Secular - Retardational impact,
passing through the respective nodes. In winter NDS
is the evening impact and S V N the morning impact,
while in summer the conditions are reversed.

Prop. 4.

The wave length of the Tidal wave is the length from
crest to crest of a tide whether primary or secondary,
and is variable in different parts of the globe. The period
of oscillation, alike for all tidal waves, is a complete to-
and-fro oscillation in a tidal interval i.e. in a semi-lunar
or semi-tidal day.

Prop. 5.

The forces of action and reaction of the Secular Re-
tardation, the primiry forces giving rise to the tides, are
kinetic movements of the fluids of the air and water of
the Tidal Basin directed respectively round the Earth

103

from east to west and west to east; with the respective
resultants in the plane of the equator.

Prop. 6.

The forces of action and reaction giving rise to the di-
urnal tides of the Precessional component of impact; are
kinetic movements of the air and water of the globe di-
rected respectively from north to south, and south to
north, with their resultant acting at intervals of half a
lunar or tidal day.

Prop. 7.

The forces of action and reaction of the Secular Re-
tardation, the primary forces giving rise to the tides, are
in the main tangential movements of the fluids of the
Tidal Basin round the circle of the Earth,but with a ver-
tical component of force also, and further, by impact
and by convection developing radial movement and os-
cillation with the resultant on the equator.

Prop. 8.

The Tidal crests are developed approximately in quad-
rantal positions differing by 90°, by conjunctions and
oppositions of the fluids of the oceanic or Tidal Basin,
with the Tidal orb, in respect to the regions of develop-
ment.

Prop. 9.

The continental portions of the globe may be said to
have a windward and leeward side in respect to the
motions of the air and water of the globe, more particu-
larly of the Tidal Basin. In respect to the action and
reaction of Secular Retardational force the eastern shores
of the old world and the western shores of the new
world are the windward sides respectively, but at inter-
vals removed 12 tidal hours apart. By the rising and
setting of the Tidal orb and the daily course thereof
round the Earth, the windward and leeward forces are
alternately brought into play in a given region to pro-
duce the tidal waves. The winds in their actions on the
tides may be said to vary quadrantly in the diurnal
rotation.

Prop. 10.

The trade winds and anti-trades as affecting the entire
Earth, have an alternating quadrantal variation of force
in the diurnal rotation, in two quadrants the given force
of action or reaction is increasing, and in two quadrants
decreasing, the change of average wind force being effec-
ted synchroniously with the development of the tides,
and acting as a tide producer affecting the height of the
tidal waves and positions of the tidal phase. The <juad-

104

rantal variation of trade wind and anti-trade wind force
in a tidal day is respectively in opposite directions, in-
crease of the one being marked by decrease of the other
and vice versa, in respect to the fluids of the eccentric.

Prop. 11.

There are barometric changes of quadrantal variation
accompanying and affecting the development and height
of the tides.

Prop. 12.

With the Moon and Sun in conjunction at new Moon
in the equator, the east to west or action forces of the
tides extend round the Earth in the quadrants possessing
a time range of 4 a.m. to 10 a.m. and 4 p.m. to 10 p.m.
respectively, while in the quadrants possessing a time
10 a.m. to 4 p.m., and 10 p.m. to 4 a.m. alternate to the
above, the west to east or forces of reaction prevail.
This is especially the case with reference to the effects
of the semi-diurnal barometrical maximums of the Sun.

Prop. 13.

The forces of action and reaction acting on the air and
water and encountering motion of unmoved fluid or the
solid Earth, are equally competent to raise a tidal cresr,
and inertia must itself be regarded as a force in this
connection.

Prop. 14.

The quadrantal variation of trade wind and anti-trade
wind force is equivalent to a quadrantal variation of east
to west and west to east impact and pressure on the
ocean waters alternately superposed over a whole quad-
rant of the globe, or of the waters ef the ocean, and with
the greatest oscillation of force on the equator in respect
to the Secular Retardation resultant of movement and
impact of the fluids. This quadrantal variation of the
wind, forces the ocean into a quadrantal oscillation
with its tidal crests quadrantly placed.

Prop. 15.

The east to west quadrantal force which develops
tidal crest at the Galapagos, develops tidal trough at a
point 45° further west, while the west to east force which
develops tidal crest at Borneo develops tidal trough at
the Galapagos.

Prop. 16.

The quadrantal forces of wind variation develop two
phases of tangential piling and compress of the ocean
waters in regions removed 180° apart, and two phases of
tangential removal and rarefaction removed 180° apart.
These phases of compress and rarefaction synchronate

105

with tidal development and force, and determine the
period of oscillation, giving for each region two tides,
(each an ebb and a flow) per lunar or tidal day. The
length of the tidal waves is determined by the ocean
depth and that superposition of the elementary units
and waves of vibration which is in keeping with a
semi-diurnal period of oscillation. This period requires
quadrantal positions of the tidal waves round the equa-
tor of the globe, with crest and trough in the alternate
octants, a condition modified by variations of oceanic
depth affecting the wave length and velocity.

Prop. 17.

The lesser is comprehended in the greater. The action
and reaction view of Prop. 2 and 3 in relation to the
Secular-Retardational-Precessional impact comprehends
all wind, current, and tide effects of air and ocean, winds
and tides being the manifestations of the action and re-
action of the fluids of the air and ocean under Preces-
sional-Secular-Retardational-Nutational force, and the
latter largely called into action by the eccentric position
of the fluids of the globe upon the Pacific Ocean side of
the globe, this eccentricity giving rise to a polarised os-
oscillation of the fluids, which polarises all the tidal
effects on the Galapagos and Borneo, near Ecuador and
Sumatra, on an equatorial diameter of the Earth which
is at once the tidal axis and the Seismological axis of the
globe.

Prop. 18.

The arrangement of Seismological effects to the ocean
and tides and to the position of the tidal axis, are such
as to indicate that they are correlated phenomena, and
that the former equally with the latter, are produced by
the Precessional-Secular-Retardational forces P E, G F
of Fig. l,p. 44, and by that movement of the external
fluids of the globe as they are operated upon by these
forces, more especially with reference to the semi-diur-
nal oscillation of the fluids arising from their eccentric
position to the globe as illustrated in Figs, 7, 8, 9, and 10.

Prop. 19.

The Secular Retardation force, displacing vast volumes
of air and water, and changing their pressure on the
crust of the globe over quadrantal or hemispherical areas,
is the great producer of Seismological effects, hence vol-
canic eruptions and earthquakes will prevail in greatest
number and violence when the Moon's course is lowest,
i.e. when her path round the Earth coincides most
nearly with that of the equator, and will be a minimum

in number and violence when the Moon's course is
highest, that is when her path round the Earth cuts the
equator at the greatest angle, and the Moon attains its
highest declination in the period of revolution of the
nodes, or we may say that seismological phenomena and
the height of the tides vary together.

Prop. 20.

The angle E C M (Pig. 1, p. 44) is greater for the Moon
than for the Sun by about 20° of azimuth, hence at the
establishment of the tides, the effects of the Moon and
Sun are not perfectly superposed, and the tides do not
rule highest, until the Moon has advanced on her
monthly course, by about 20° of longitude.

Prop. 21.

In the kinetic and pressure impacts of the air of the
Tidal Basin, the fluids of the ocean are moving in a man-
ner not unlike that of the mercury of the barometer sub-
jected to variation of pressure, and not unlike how the
mercury would move were the barometer so constructed
as to form an anemometer. The tides in their develop-
ment are the average expression of this movement of the
air and its hemispherical or quadrantal variations as
these give rise to trade wind and anti-trade wind force.

Prop. 22.

The directions and forces of the atmospheric circula-
tion and their interactions in their resultants and details,
and those of the oceanic circulation and oceanic tides,
are determined at any given moment by those of Secular
Retardation, Precession, and Nutation.

Prop. 23.

The whole force urging the Atmosphere and ocean into
circulation at any given moment is proportionate to that
which gives rise to Secular Retardation, Precession, and
Nutation.

Prop. 24.

The whole force urging the ocean into tides at any
given moment is proportionate to that of Secular Re-
tardation,

Prop. 25.

As the force of Secular Retardation increases that of
Precession decreases, and vice versa, by the changing in-
clinations of the lunar orbit. Hence the mean monthly
height of the tides and the value of Secular Retardation
and Precession are varying together, but the latter in
opposite directions.

Prop. 26.
Whatever view qf the tides be tal^en, kinetic considera-

10?

tions must take preference over all others as the force
producing the tides, and equally as the force producing
Secular Retardation, Precession and Nutation, without
west to east impact of fluids against the rotating Earth
there can be no Secular Retardation, and without a
north to south component of impact of the fluids, no
Precession, and without hemispherical or quadrantal al-
ternations of impact and recoil in relation to conjunc-
tions and quadratures of the Tidal Basin, with the Tidal
Orb, there can be no tides.

Prop. 27.

The four tidal waves of the equator separated by
about 90° of longitude, alternate in phase and superpose,
so as to appear in any given longitude or region as two
tides separated by twelve tidal hour intervals. The
superposition is not always perfect, and this is one cause
of diurnal tides.

Prop. 28.

Two tides per tidal day enter the Atlantic from the
east originated in Polynesia, and two tides per tidal day
enter the Atlantic from the west originated near the Gala-
pagos, and these four tides received per day into the
Atlantic superpose and pass up the Atlantic as two tides
only per tidal day.

Prop. 29.

The superpositions of the tidal waves are comparable
with those which occur in the reflection and refraction
of light vibrations, the phenomena commonly known as
interference; while quadrantal tides of position, but
hemispherical tides of time, may be compared with that
principle by which elementary vibrations are made to
compose the wave front of a ray of light, a principle
which may perhaps b3 extended to embrace every wave
and ripple of the ocean as contributing to the whole
tidal effect.

Prop. 30.

We miy regard the two tidal troughs of the Galapagos
as due to the operation of action, and the two tidal crests
as due to the operation of reaction thus giving rise to
two complete tidal waves in this region by the operation
of four quadrantal forces. And similarly for each region
possessing tide raising force. The region of Borneo re-
garded as alternately a windward and leeward shore of
the old world dam, appears to possess a tide raising force
only secondary to that of the Galapagos.

Prop, 31.
The tides of the Atlantic shores are high, as compared

108

with others of the globe, because the Atlantic re
calves wast; going tides from the region of Polynesia, and
east going tides from the region of the Galapagos, the
two sets of tidal waves being received in the Atlantic
under conditions of superposition and double phase.

Prop. 32.

The primary tides of the ocean are two tidal waves
lying immediately to the east of the meridian of Tahiti
and to the west of the meridian of Tahiti respectively,
the former radiating eastwards and polewards, the latter
westwards and polewards, the two radiations superpos-
ing and polarising in the Atlantic, and as a superposed
and polarised oscillation passes up the Atlantic to the
north polar regions, crest and trough, ebb and flow,
both being radiated from the Polynesian oscilla-
tions lying respectively to the east and west of Tahiti
as given, and of which Tahiti is always a node, and in a
manner such that Tahiti may be regarded as in a tideless
sea, any diurnal oscillation of level of the ocean waters
at Tahiti being due to other causes than those which
produce the semi-diurnal or lunar tides.

Prop. 33.

Tahiti is the node of the tangential oscillation of the
fluid eccentric of the globe under the forces P E,G F of
Fitr. 1, p. 44, and as illustrated in Figs. 7, 8, 9, and 10,
and so possess no tide in respect to this oscillation, the
tidal effects radiating from the Tahiti node, by an alter-
nate rise and fall of the waters of the ocean east and west
of the node, a rise and fall which is propagated east-
wards and westwards and outwards in directions away
from the Tahiti an node.

Prop. 34.

The 24 hour tide, with high water at noon, the only
tide at Tahiti, marks a change of level of the entire
Pacific Ocean, and for that matter of the entire Ocean,
of which Tahiti being in a tideless sea, is the index.
[N. B. This change of level appears to be due to an ec-
centric position of the Earth's centre of gravity, which
at all times appears to lie upon the side of the Earth next
the Sun, and so is relatively revolving round the Earth
from east to west, and the ocean waters endeavour to
take the form of a sphere round the centre of gravity,
and thus ^ive rise to the noon elevation of the ocean
waters around Tahiti, forming its noonday flux, the only
elevation of that region, and which flux only respects the
position of the Sun, and always occurs at noon, no matter
what may be the position of the Moon, atid only respects

ioa

the position of the Sun as a flow tide in respect to conjunc-
tion at noon and as an ebb tide in respect to opposition
at midnight, and therefore is not produced as the tides
proper are produced, because with respect to the latter,
both conjunction and opposition of the orb synchronise
in period with a complete ebb and flow of the tide, giving
two complete ebb and fJo\v tides per tidal day, as against
one per solar day at Tahiti.]

Prop. 35.

The modification, of the height of the semi-diurnal or
lunar tides constituting the diurnal inequality, is largely
due to the 24 solar hour gravitational change" of position
of the Earth's centre of gravity, with corresponding
changes of level of the ocean of which the index is at the
Tahitian tidal node ; this change of level appearing at
Tahiti as a tide of 24 solar hour period, with high water
at noon, and low water at midnight, and is the only tide
of this region of the ocean. This 24 solar hour tide which
we may call the gravitational eccentric, is worldwide in
dimensions, a protuberance in one hemisphere of the
globe, a depression in the other, affecting the height of
the tides on every shore, on the average elevating their
calculated or normal height in the hemisphere of the
globe illuminated by the Sun, depressing them in the
nocturnal hemisphere, i.e. in respect to direct action,
but setting up currents of the ocean, more especially in
the higher latitudes, possessing indirect effects and pro-
ducing diurnal inequalities of various characters, accord-
ing to the directions and set of ihe currents.

284. — That oceanic protuberance with its greatest ele-
vation near Tahiti at noon, and its greatest depression
near Tahiti at midnight, from day to day all the year-
round, produces a diurnal change of level of the ocean at
Tahiti of 1? feet, and the eccentricity of the centre of
gravity of the Earth, that is, its departure from the
centre of form, will be such, that its diurnal east to west
orbit round the centre of form will possess a major axis
exceeding this amount, for consequent upon the rapid
rotation of the Earth the full change of level of the ocean
in the gravitational eccentric is never equal to that of
the forces producing it, or to the change of form of the
ocean which the forces could produce were the Earth
more stationary. This east to west movement of the
oceanic eccentric with the Tahitian culmination, con-
tributes a share of the Precessional-Secular-Retarcla-
tional impact, and correlated oceanic currents.

lid

Prop. 36.

Whatever be the value of the force of Precession re-
garded as a force rotating the Earth in the meridian of
the equinoxes, descendingly in respect to the tangent
passing through the vernal equinox, and ascendingly in
respect to that passing through the autumnal equinox,
and modified by the attraction of the Sun aud Moon on
the protuberant equator, the combined effects producing
a rotation on the ecliptic axis, this value is outweighed
by the force producing Secular Retardation.

Prop. 37.

Referring to Fig. 2, p. 47, let L X or Sin obliquity of
ecliptic be the value of the force of fluid impact, the
kinetic of Precession, then L W or Cos obliquity is the
value of the force of fluid impact producing secular Re-
tardation, and the latter outweighs the former in the
proportion L W2 is to L X3

285. — In reachingthe conclusion of Prop. 37, and fram-
ing the various propositions, we have been startled to
discover that Secular Retardation impact is a force of
enormous power; a force so great that even in historical
times, it would have removed the Earth's rotation, did
not some o!;her force exist to sustain the latter, and the
calculation of the quantity of Secular Retardation given
at p. 55, sect. 157, would only be true, were the two
effects Precessional rotation N D S V Fig. 2, and Secular
Retardation E D W V, in the proportion to each other of
the forces which produce them.

286. — But with regard to the component of force L W
or i.e. L W2this force is directed round a fixed axis, the
polar axis N 0 S, and so its effects are thosa of an uni-
form accelerating force removing as much rotation of the
Earth in a given tim3 as it could confer if acting in the
opposite direction, while on the contrary Precessional
force is directed round an evanescent axis in respect to
the geographical axis of the Earth or miss aff acted, and so
the velocity of Precessional rotation is not subject to ac-
celeration : The Roemar-Br^dley ellipse of Nutation,
which is due to fluid impact in the plane of the lumr
orbit which is variable in position, deviating to opposite
sides of the equinoctial nodes in respect to east and west
by the revolution of the lunar nodes, this nutatioiial im-
pact though only a fractional component of the whole
force of fluid impact under the orbital forces P K, G F,
Fig. 1, and in the entirety producing Precession and
Secular Ratardation, this Roemer-Bradley Nutational
impact can move the polar axis and rotate the entire

Ill

Earth to a degree such, that in the period of revolution
of the lunar nodes, the Earth's poles describe an ellipse
whose major axis is 19. 3'/ and smaller axis 14.4'/, which
represents a total rotation of the globe by the nutational-
fluid-impact-component of Precessional force of at least
the circumference of this ellipse in angle, say in round
numbers a rotation of 50/y of arc in 18 years. But
Nutation force is only a small fraction of either Preces-
sion or Secular Retardation force.

287. — As a tentative approximation it would appear
that did the fluid impact P E, G F of Fig. 1, L D K V L of
Fig. 2, the Precessional-Retardational impact, act round
a fixed axis instead of an evanescent one, and were this
axis the polar axis N O S, it would bring the Earth's ro-
tation to a stop in a very much shorter time than 2611
years, while the Secular-Retardational-Component L W
or E D W V E which is so acting,is sufficient to bring the
Earth's rotation to a stop in 2911 years. Hence we are
led to the startling conclusion, that there is a force ro-
tating the Earth from west to east, equal, or approxi-
mately equal, to this force which would retard it, i.e. a
west to east force capable of conferring upon the Earth
in 2611 years the diurnal rotation which it at all times,
or approximately at all times,possesses. Thus if the Earth
is really undergoing Secular Retardation it is by the re-
lative preponderence of the Retarding forces over the
accelerating forces.

Prop. 38.

The geographical equator is the magnetic equator and
the force accelerating the Earth's rotation is electric
currents descending upon the Earth's magnetic poles, or
possessing a resultant of motion in this direction.

288. — In electric discharge of high tension in a mag-
netic field the currents do descend meridionally upon the
magnetic equator i.e. do descend upon the poles, and so
produce rotation of the field and magnet. The writer
has verified this experimentally.

Prop. 39.

The electric currents which rotate the globe will be
those of lightning and aurorae.

Prop. 40.

The Sun's light and heat supply the energy of the
electric currents which rotate the globe in the diurnal
rotation.

289. — Necessarily the electric currents of lightning
and aurorae move descend ingly upon the magnetic poles
pf the globe by the directive irifluence of terrestrial mag-

112

netism. This is certain from experiments which the
writer has made

290. — The west to east rolling clouds of the aurorae
are probably correlated effects with the west to east
electro-magnetic forces which rotate the Earth, while
the meridional auroral streamers probably mark the de-
scending electric currents giving rise to the the magnet-
ically deflected west to east rolling clouds.

Prop. 41

The electro-magnetie forces which rotate the Earth are
derived by induction and radiation, from the electro-
magnetic and mechanical forces internal to the Sun, i.e.
are the effects of the rotation or oscillation of the Sun's
magnetic nucleus and external globe, are effects of ro-
tational and orbital forces internal to the Sun.

Prop. 42.

The electro-magnetic forces which rotate the Earth are
derived by induction and radiation, from the electro-
magnetic forces of the Sun ; i.e. the mechanics of the
Earth's rotation are derived from the mechanics of the
Sun, and the lesser rotation of the Earth as produced
and maintained, is but a reflection as it were of the
greater rotation or internal mechanics of the Sun. The
Earth's rotation is a mechanical movement about its
centre of gravity ; the solar forces giving rise to the Sun's
radiation are mechanical movements of the Sun's matter
about its centre of gravity, rotational or orbital in char-
acter. The mechanics of the Sun are either those of
a magnetic nucleus, a large globe many thousands of
times greater than our Earth, rotating in 1. 1 second of
time, or of such, a globe oscillating to and fro in this
period in the Sun, along with the external mass of the
Sun, but in either case, it is a movement more or less
apparent to observation as affecting the external limits
of the Sun, and producing the rotative-scintillation of
the latter, a rotative scintillation, always more or less
manifest to observation, but especially manifest when
the Sun is near the horizon and eclipsed. This rotative-
scintillation may itself be in our atmosphere, the effects
of a pulsation of terrestrial magnetism keeping time with
solar induction effects, but none the less effects marking
the mechanics of the Sun.

292. — If we suppose inertia to be a constant fora
given quantity of matter, the fluids of the ocean and at-
mosphere are in a east to west motion sufficient to effect
Precession, but if as is probable — inertia and gravity
increase together, then it would appear that there are

113

atcut the Eaith f trie's mi] crc7erable 1o cur lesls, \\hxh
are assisting 1o pi educe Precc^sicn by their in pact
against the Eaith in the oibiial plane of the Me en ancl
Sun, and acting as forces PE, G F of Fig. 1.

293. — The external ]iinits of the Bun maybe subject
to lotaticnal acceleration by the internal mechanics of
the solar magnetic nucleus, but the electric discharge
of the photosphere may be of direction such as to pro-
duce an electro-magnetic force retarding the external
limits of the Sun to a degree equal to the accelerative
influences of the magnetic nucleus but in opposite
direction.

Prop. 43.

The light and heat of the Sun arises from mechanical
motions of ponderable matter opposedly directed.

Prop. 44.

The light and heat of the Sun arises from mechanical
motions of ponderable matter opposedly directed, of
which the internal mass of the Sun engaged in such mo-
tion is strongly magnetic, with lines of force extending
into space beyond the confines of the solar system, and
acting directly upon the matter of comets in this sys-
tem, sufficiently to affect the form of comets and the
circulation of their gases in the observed effects of
their approach and retiral from the Sun.

Prop. 45.

The mechanics of the Sun are such as constitute it an
electro-magnetic dynamo.

Prop. 46.

The external limits of the Sun at the base of its at-
mosphere are cool and solid and possessed of magnetism
oppositely polarised to that of the internal nucleus.

Prop. 47.

The light and heat and circulation of the Sun arises
from electro-magnetic effects of the absolute and relative
motions of the armature and field together forming its
entire mass, and each for the most part, coo;, solid, pon-
derable matter, but in their entirety enclosed in a fluid
or gaseous envelope forming the cool atmosphere, hot
photosphere, and outer chromosphere and corona.

Prop. 48.

The central forces resident in the ponderable matter
of the Sun, are rotational in the nucleus regarded as a
globe, are rotational in the nucleus and external enclos-
ing sphere regarded as relatively rotating in the opposite
direction, or they are orbital in respect to the motion of
the nucleus and external enclosing sphere, or they are

lit

both combined. But in any view the light and heat of
the Sun is derived from the momentums of the internal
and external matter of the Sun opposedly directed abso-
lutely or relatively, i.e. movements of two ponderable
masses together forming the Sun, and both endowed
with magnetism and in such a way as to constitute the Sun
an electro-magnetic dynamo of similar type to those of
our various electric lighting and power establishments
but on a vastly more magnificent scale, we were going
to say, infinitely so.

Prop. 49.

There are various ways in which we may harness and
uiake use of the electro-magnetic forces ol the Sun to do
the work of the world.

293. — But to return to the more proper work of this
treatise, to terra firma, as the inhabitants of the world
are not yet ready for receiving proper conceptions of the
Sun, (though we could not forbear to sow a few more
seeds of progress, and endeavour to lift science from the
slough of passivity in which even the Newtonian philo-
sophy has left it) we will endeavour further to deal with
matters within the grasp of the most ordinary common
eense, and for which it may be almost ready.

295.— Let Figs. 11, 12, 13, 14, illustrate four posi-
tions of the Moon occurring consecutively by the revolu-
tion of the nodes effected in G793.4 days. These posi-
tions alternate successively in the order given at inter-
vals ftom Fitr. to Fig. of f;7f"4 days. The arrowed curve
about the poles N and S, each represents the ellipse of
Nutation, discovered by Roemer, and elucidated by
Bradley, and which we name the Roemar-Braclley ellipse
§ 286, p. 110. Its major axis is in the solstitial plane or
colure, N W E S of Fig 2, 11, 12, 13, and 14, and its
minor axis is in the equinoctial plane or colure, N D S V
of these Figs. The dimensions are, major axis 19.3'/
minor axis 14.4", and the pole N makes a revolution of
th:s^in 6793.4 days, superposed upon the Precession N T I
whose circuit is accomplished by the Precessional rota-
tion L D K V in 25000 years. The south pole S describes
in Nutation a synchronous and similar path to that of
the north pole N but in the opposite hemisphere, the two
cones of Nutation of the two hemispheres having the
centre of the Earth for their apex. The actual path of
the pole as the joint effect of Precession and Nutaton is
a waved line the resultant of the combined motions of
Precession and Nutation, but we may regard the Roemer-
Bradley effect, as an ellipse as illustrated in the Figs.

115

296. — The Roeiner-Bradley ellipse correctly inter-
preted is a measure of the entire Precessional forces and
the exchanges of action and reaction of the atmospheric
Circulation, Oceanic Tides and Circulation, Secular Re-
tardation, Earth's Diurnal Rotation, and Solar Radia-
tion, all of which are correlated phenomena. Hence
although it may appear but a small movement of the
terrestrial axis, it is one full of profound meaning, and
consequences of the highest import.

Fig. 11. Fig 12.

297. — Fig. 11 is taken at the period when the ascend-
ing node of the lunar orbit coincides with the vernal
equinox. Tha obliquit}^ of the ecliptic n c P for this po-
sition is a maximum by about 9. 6// above the mean value
(that of Figs, 12 and 14,) but by the precessional retro-
gression of the nodes, the ascending node is about to
pass into the western cardinal hemisphere NWS when
the impact of the fluids of the air and ocean R D Q V,
under the orbital forces P E, G F of \\*. 1 will
in part be directed downwards from north to
south in the vernal-equinoctial-side of the western
cardinal hemisphere, i.e. in the quadrant N W S D N
and upwards in the autmnal-equinoctial-side of the
eastern cardinal hemisphere i.e. in the quadrant NES VN,
therefore the two impacts upon the opposite sides of the
globe, in the opposite cardinal hemispheres forma couple
rotating the Earth in Nutation in the direction EN WS
reducing the obliquity of the ecliptic, while the great-
ness of the angle of obliquity R D E over the mean value
in passing from the position of Fig. 11 to tliEt of Fig. 12,
with a correspondingly great Precessional resultant
N D S V causes Precession to proceed at a greater pace
than its injan rate in proportion as the angle of obliquity,
R C E is greater than the mean value of the obliquity,
producing effects on the Roemer-Bradley elipse culmin-

afcmg in the position shown in Fig.12, where n the North
Pole has m*de a quarter revolution of the ellipse b n d,
and Precession is now proceeding at its mean rate, and
when the ascending node of the Moon coincides with the
solstitial colurein the western cardinal hemisphere NKS.
At this time the Nutational advance in Precession is a
maximum by about half the minor axis of the Roemer-
Bradley ellipse. But the retrogression of the lunar

Fig. 13. Fig; 14.

nodes continuing, we reach the position indicated in
Fig. 13 when the lunar ascending node coincides with
the autumnal equinox. Clearly in passing from the posi-
tion of Fig. 12 to that of Fig. 13 the Precessional impact
of fluids M D Q V is impinging on the protuberant equa-
tor W D E V and moving over the EaitU so as to exert
a couple on the Earth of decreasing force in respect to
Precessional impact N D S V, and also in respect to the
force of impact E D W S,which acts to decrease the angle
11 C P or i.e. N CP or i.e. to reduce tlie obliquity of the
ecliptic, hence in the passage of the Moon from the posi-
tion referable to Fig. 12 to that of Fig. 13 the movement
of the Pole n is carried round to the position h, the ob-
liqui y of the ecliptic h c P is now a minimum and the
return of the Pole on the opposite side of the Roemer-
Bradley ellipse commences, Precessional Nutation pass-
ing into the minus sign, and obliquity of the ecliptic in-
creasing as the impact of the fluids of the air and waters
of the ocean under the forces P E, G F of Fig. 1, attain
the direction LX/ ZK YL of Fig. 14, when the ascend-
ing node of the Moon attains its greatest eastern elonga-
tion or azimuth in the solstitial culure N E S W in the
eastern cardinal hemisphere. The polar axis is now in
the position N C S, Nutation in Precession possesses the
greatest minus sign, the Pole being in Precession behind
the mean value by about 7. 2 ' calculated upon its average
advance of one complete circle in 25,000 years, while^as

lit

in Fig, 12 the obliquity of the ecliptic is a mean Value.
From Fig. 14 .we pass again to Fig. 11 with which we set
out, which completes these illustrations of the fluid im-
pact and variations of the couple accompanying the revo-
lution of the lunar nodes and producing the Roemer-
Bradley Nutation superposed upon Precession. The ac-
tual value of Nutation is further modified by monthlv
and annual variations of obliquity and direction of the
Earth's axis and plane of rotation due to the attraction of
the Sun and moon on the protuberant equator, to which
hitherto the whole effects of Precession and Nutation has
been assigned, but which protuberant equator effects on
Precession are compensatory and have no outstanding
value when a whole year is considered, and so no out-
standing value for any succession of years, and so cannot
be regarded as producing Precession at all, but only a
nutation of Precession.

Prop. 50.

The forces rotating the planets, retarding their rota-
tions and limiting the velocity thereof, and determining
the inclination of the axis of each to the orbit, are similar
to those of our Earth as dealt with in this treatise.

Cor. All the planets possess a cool solid magnetic globe,
an ooean, an atmosphere, electric matter, and in general
a structure resembling o:ir Earth including the eccentric
distribution of land and fluids, and their conditions can
be approximated from the results of telescopic obser-
vation.

Prop. 51.

For cq-ial planetary conditions the forces retarding; the
rotation of a planet follow a law resembling that of the
tides viz. vary inversely as the cube of the distance of
the planet from the Sun, wfiile the forces producing
rotation follow the law of radiated light, viz. vary inver-
sely as the square of the distance from the Sun. The
two sets of forces modified by the resulting annual in-
clination limit the period of rotation.

Cor. Other things being equal, the more remote a
planet is from the Sun the faster it will rotate.

298. — Time would fail me to go into all the propositions,
corollaries, inferences, and extensions, which arise from
the discovery of the kinetics of Precession, and of the
electro-magnetic source of the planetary rotations as
manifested by that of the Earth, and I must now confine
myself more immediately to the Tides of the Ocean, and
the Atmospheric Circulation with the view of closing
this treatise.

299. — All theories of the tides which do not recognise

Ill

the effects of the eccentricity of the fluids, the air and
water of tha ocean, and that of the continental or land-
ward protuberance of the globe, are worthless. Without
this eccentricity, whatever might be the circulation of
the atmosphere and ocean, the semi-diurnal tides of the
ocean would cease.

Fig. 15. Fig. 16, Fig. 17.

UNDULATORY or RADIANT THEORY of the TIDES.

300. — The forces producing the tides affect the entire
ocean with an en masse movement under the forces, but
the tidal effects are segmental with nodes distributed
over the ocean, the wave or segmental lengths being de-
termined by the position, form, area, and depth of the
sea affected. The principal node is Tahiti. In the vari-
ous figures 15 to 20, T represents the position of Tahiti.
In Fig. 18 Tahiti is shown as the summit of the fluid ec-
centric. The major mass of this eccentric is water. The
orbit of the Earth is indicated by the line C B, as it
moves about the luminary M or M/ the Moon or Sun.
The centre of gravity of the fluid eccentric is represented
by O(, that of the continental protuberance by C", and
during a diurnal rotation whether with respect to the lu-
nar or solar day, that of the Moon or Sun, the distance of
C' and 07/'from each other is variable, and the oscillation
of distance synchronises in pitch or i.e. in period with
that of the tides.

301. — We began this treatise by assigning the whole
tidal effects to movements of the atmosphere. Its great
extent, mobility, and power and weight of the winds,
seemed to point to the atmosphere as the tide raiser as
did the magnitude of Precess'onal effects. But we now
find that there is a great direct actionon the waters,
that this is the major action in raising the tides, but that
ojean and atmosphore conjoin their forces in what may

119

be denominated the action and reaction of the fluid ec-
centric, a term we now use to include both air arid water.
Further we now take the view that the semi-diurnal
barometrical maximum is due chiefly to an oscillation of
the atmosphere of compress and rarefaction, i.e. is an at-
mospheric tide and though it must necessarily affect the
level of the ocean and height of the oceanic tides, it does
not appear to be a major cause of the tides.

Fig. 18. Fig. 19. Fig. 20.

302. — In Fig. 15 let M be the luminary, the Moon or
Sun. Let the Earth's diurnal rotation be indicated by
the arrowed circle, and let C'the centre of gravity of
the fluid eccentric be in the meridian immediately under
the luminary. Then the fluid eccentric is impelled by a
force P E which causes the fluids to outrun the Earth in
the orbit, at the same time that the continental protu-
berance C" holds the solid Earth back by a force G F.
Thus the ocean waters are removed from the quadrant
A into the quadrant D. The inpouring of waters into
the quadrant D, increasing the mass and weight of water
in this quadrant, developes descending currents, arising
from the superior weight of water, while removal of
water from the quadrant A, developes ascending cur-
rents, arising from hydraulic pressure from below due to
the more unmoved parts of the ocenn remote from the
force PE. The movements A and D represent tidal
phase and are oppositely directed. Hence there will al-
ways be a difference of half a vibratory period upon op-
posite sides of C' with respect to east and west. The
centre of gravity C; of the fluid eccentric appears to be
in a radius of the Earth emergent at Tahiti, and the point
of emergence of this radius is at all times a tidal node,
and there will always be a difference of phase of

120

half a vibratory period in the two arcs or half wave
lengths of tide immediately to the east and west of Tahiti.
303.— Referring to Figs. 15 and 16. When Tahiti (T)
is directly under the luminary M at Oor24 o'clock'! ahitan
time, the force PE acting on the oceanic eccentric Cy
is a maximum, and when Tahiti is directly opposite at
12 o'clock Tahitaii time the force G F acting on the ec-
centric is a maximum, while on the other hand at 6
o'clock and 18 o'clock Tahitan time, when Tahiti is at
quadrature with the luminaay there is no force P E or
G F acting on the eccentric C/ or T (see Fig. 18;. The
variations of G F and P E in respect to the landward
protuberance of which C'/ is the centre of gravity are in
momentum effects equal to those acting on the fluid ec-
centric and coincide therewith, but are opposite in direc-
tion. At the moment Tahiti is under the luminary or
opposed to the luminary the eccentricity CC/ or the dis-
tance O/C// is a a maximum, while at the moment it is 6
or 18 o'clock at Tahiti ; i.e. when Tahiti is at morning or
evening quadrature with the luminary, the eccentricity
CC/ or distance C/ C// is a minimum. The radial varia-
tion CC/ of the eccentricity, and the tangential displace-
ment? E,GF of the fluid eccentric the combined displace-
ment at the conjunctions of the eccentric, and return to
the normal position at the quadratures, this reciprocat-
ing movement of the fluid eccentric and protuberant
solids of the globe, is the cause of the tides Having re
gard to the orbital motion CB, the effect of the forces CC/
and P E is to raise the ocean level over the entire hem-
isphere into which the resultant is directed, and which
may be denominated the Western Polynesian or Old
World hemisphere, and to lower the ocean level over
that from which the resultant is directed, which may be
denominated the Eastern Polynesian or New World
hemisphere, and the withdrawal of the forces 0 C/ and
PE at the quadratures of G/ returns the waters to their
normal level. This is the reciprocating motion of the
ocean arising from its eccentric position and that of the
air resting on it, which gives rise to the tides, a dis-
placement embracing the entire mass of the ocean, and
the displacement of the ocean mass and air and that of
the solid globe by the forces C C/,C C//, P E, G F, in which
C of the solid Earth, and C/ of the fluids recede from
each other, and move from their normal position at the
conjunction of the eccentric with the luminary is sufficient
when converted into returning momentum and impact at
the approach to "the quadrature of the eccentric, to gen-

121

erate the radiant energy of the tides. Whenever mo-
mentum is destroyed by impact, in whatever way, in
some form or other radiant energy results, and the tides
are but an expression of this law on a gigantic scale.
The forces PE, C C', CO//, GF develope potential of
position at the conjunctions of the eccentric with the
luminary, when the solid globe and oceanic eccentric are
most wide apart, with returning momentum when they
approach most nearly together in passing to quad-
rature, and the momentum destroyed by impact of the
Earth and ocean under a collision which occurs every
tidal interval, the destroyed momentum appears as tidal
undulation and radiation, passing over the ocean as tidal
waves, which again have their momentum dispersed by
thermal radiation. To pursue analogies further, light
radiation itself may be but the effects of molecular tides,
or i.e. tides in what may be regarded as fluid oceans of
the molecules, more especially when the light is the har-
monic spectral bright line radiations of the fluids of the
molecules of a hot gas.

304.— Dealing with the force C C/ and P E, and regard-
ing (T) immediately over C on the radius G G1 as Tahiti,
the inpouring of water of the ocean into Western Poly-
nesia immediately to the west of Tahiti (T) and its with-
drawal from Eastern Polynesia immediately to the east
of Tahiti, produces descending and ascending tidal phase
immediately to the west and east of Tahiti respectively,
culminating as the Earth rotates, in trough and crest in
the alternate Polynesian tidal segments, about two hours
past the position under consideration's shown in Fig. 16,
trough in Western Polynesia, crest in Eastern, the centres
of the trough and crest in longitude 180 W. and 120 W.
respectively, which crest and trough occurring at about
2 o'clock Tahiti time are primary tidal waves of the
globe, in the phase indicated,of which Tahiti is the node,
the former or Western Polynesian segmental undulation
radiating westwards and polewards, the latter or East-
ern Polynesian segmental undulation radiating east-
wards and polewards, but neither wave radiates directly
across the Tahitian node, but which latter is at all times
and every moment a node both in respect to the lunar
and solar primary tides, and the two segmental undula-
tions,the lunar, each cover an arc of about 60°upon opposite
sides of Tahiti in respect to east to west, and these
two undulations at all times differ in phase by half
a vibratory period.

305. — Referring to Fig. 16. This fig. is taken as at

2 o'clock Tahitian time. At about 2 o'clock Tahitian
time the primary tide in ebb phase of the Polynesian
Ocean may be said to be established, whether \ve regard
the tide of conjunction or opposition, i.e. the day or
night tide, both of which are similarly produced. It is
then slack water on the Polynesian trough on the meri-
dian of 180° at 0 or 24 o'clock local time of this meridian,
and slack water on the Eastern Polynesian crest in long-
itude 120° W. at 4 o'clock local time of this meridian, a
potentiality of position occurring at 2 o'clock Tahiti
time, and adapted to radiate the tides in directions mov-
ing away from the Tahitian node to all parts of the ocean,
and the Tahitian node T,at Tahiti in longitude 150,° and
immediately above the centre of gravity of the fluid ec-
centric C^may be regarded as the radiant source of all
the tidal waves of the globe, or the point Cy directly un-
der Tahiti may be regarded as their radiant point. The
height and position of all other tidal waves will be de-
termined in proper radiant sequence by the amplitude
and position of the Polynesian, the paths their radiations
take, and the areas and depth of ocean transited by the
waves, modified by effects of superposition and inter-
ference, segmental, nodal, and phase superposition in
the two lunar or two solar tidal rays, the east and
west going of each luminary and also superposition
of segments, nodes, and phases of the lunar and solar
tidal waves, as these meet, cross, and overlap each
other, varied by dimensional differences, and differences
of radiant velocity, between the lunar and solar tidal
waves.

306. — The pitch of the semi-diurnal lunar tides is a
complete to and fro vibration effected twice per lunar day,
and for solar tides effected twice per solar day, thus the
two pitches agree so nearly in period, that large effects
of superposition and interference arise from the overlap
of the two systems.

307. — Apart from effects of superposition and interfer-
ence the two systems of tidal waves, the lunar and solar,
may be regarded as independent of each other.

308. — As the pitch of the tide for the Moon or Sun,
synchronises with the period of action of the forces pro-
ducing it, i.e. the alternations of CO', PE, and CO/' GF,
the pitch or phase produced by successive conjunctions
of the luminary with the eccentric raises a sequence of
tides which are mutually strengthening and sustaining,
in respect to the tides of the given luminary.

309. — We have shown the position of the primary

123

tides of the ocean, i.e. about Tahiti, radiating from Tahiti
in the directions r and r/,Figs. 15 to 20, we are not called
upon to show the positions of all the tidal waves of the
ocean as these are successively transmitted over the en-
tire mass, this can only be done by observations and
careful charting, but approximately there results from
lunar action four crests and four troughs in a belt of
longitude passing eastwards and westwards from Tahiti
to the southern side of the Atlantic, in a distribution of
crest and trough resembling the waved curve of Fig.17,
the radiations from Tahiti (T) meeting at s and s/ (the
southern side of the Atlantic) under conditions of like
phase, as shown by the arrowed movement, r and r/and
resulting at the south side of the Atlantic sands7 in
a wave of double amplitude, a superposition and com-
bination which greatly enhances the tides of the Atlantic
as compared with those of the Pacific, as the superposed
waves radiate np the Atlantic to its northernmost limits.
Any regions of very low tides in the Atlantic, constantly
low, are segmental wave nodes, the regions of the great-
est tides, segmental wave centres.

310. — Only where the nodes coincide in respect to both
lunar and solar segments are tides actually absent.
Such a segmental node is Tahiti on the primary tide,
but there may be subsidiary segmental nodes of second-
ary character, and observations appear to "ndicate that
there are such.

311. — The constancy of position of the Tahitian node
indicates that the tides are not due simply to the
wanderings of the Moon, and Sun over the ocean carry-
ing the effects from position to position, with like effects
for successive positions, but to these movements as they
affect something of fixed position indicated by the sta-
tionary position of the Tahitiaii node, and this thiug of
fixed position is the oceanic eccentric or its centre of
gravity C ', whose oscillations whatever be the position
of the luminary are always to and fro about the radius
C T or the centre of gravity C', and over a small path.

312. — The tidal energy measured by dimensions and
amplitude of the tidal waves taken together, varies in-
versely as the square of the distance from the source,
hence the greatest and least tides occur when the Poly-
nesian waves of the first order in respect to the Moon
and Sun are centrally superposed to the east and west
of Tahiti, in Iilcephas3 in respect to the tides of the con-
junctions as shown in Fig. 20, and similarly superposed
but differing in phase by half a vibratory period at tha

124

quadratures in Fig. 20, the dotted crest and trough re-
presents the solar primary title of Polynesia. These
superpositions in Polynesia occur about two days after
new and full Moon in respect to spring tides, and about
two days after the quadratures in respect to neap effects.
The earlier superpositions being always the greater
along the course of the tidal waves as they radiate from
Polynesia, it follows that the whole ocean reflects gen-
erally the condition of Polynesia, but with segmental
variations of effect giving local departures from the gen-
eral rule that the tides are highest about two days after
the conjunctions and least about two days after the quad-
ratures. Hence most places will have their spring tides
about two days after the conjunctions, and neap tides
two days after the quadratures, but there will be local
departures from this general rule. Compare Figs. 19 & 20.

313. — The physics of the tides should be referred to
Tahiti time.

314. — Just as the semi-diurnal or tides proper are pro-
duced by the action of the Moon and Sun on the
oceanic eccentric, so the diurnal inequality is produced
by these luminaries acting on the protuberant equa-
tor of the ocean, i.e. the tides proper are produced
by gravitation of the Moon and Sun acting on what maybe
denominated the right ascensional or longitudinal eccen-
tric, while the diurnal inequality is produced by gravita-
tion of the luminary acting 011 what may be denominated
the rotational, meridional, or latitudinal eccentricity of
the fluids of the ocean, the protuberance of the fluids
produced by the centrifugal force of the Earth's rotation
accentuated by the geographical, longitudinal, or right
ascensional eccentricity.

315. — The fluids of the ocean, as the result of the cen-
trifugal equatorial protuberance, acted on by gravitation
of the luminary, are alternately thrown from the north-
ern geographical or celestial hemisphere of the globe
into the southern and vice versa, at intervals of 12 hours,
giving one complete to and fro meridional oscillation
in 24 hours, and this 24-hour meridional tide, superposed
upon the 12-hour longitudinal tide, is the cause of the
diurnal inequality of the latter, an inequality which
vanishes when the Sun and Moon are both situated in
the plane of the equatorial protuberance.

316. — Referring to Figs. 21 arid 22 let T be the summit
of the oceanic eccentric, and of the equatorial protuber-
ance, the combined summit of the two eccentricities
appearing to be in the longitude of Tahiti in cen-

125

trai Polynesia. Then when it is 0 or 24 o'clock day time
at the summit in respect to the luminary, the Moon or
Sun, and the luminary is situated in declination removed
from the protuberance and eccentric, as shown in Fig.
21, then the luminary is by gravitation pulling the fluids
in the direction B B and pouring water out of the north-
ern hemisphere directly into the southern, and setting
up the ascending and descending potentials of tidal move-
ment A and D in the respective hemispheres, while 12
hours later as shown in Fig. 22 the reverse occurs and
the solid globe being now pulled in the direction in
which the fluids were previously pulled,thus is set upa 24-
hour meridional tidal oscillation or wave of which a point
near Tahiti is the "node, but which meridional oscillation
moves round the Pacific following the course of the Moon
and Sun as the luminary rises and sets in its daily march,
in a manner resembling that which has heretofore been
assigned to the ordinary tides, and the superposition of
the 24-hour meridional tide upon the 12-hour ordinary
tides, is the cause of the diurnal inequality. If on the
morning semi-diurnal tide the superposition of the diur-
nal meridional tide is in like phase with the former or-
dinary tides, say phase A of Fig. 21, then on the evening
tide the superposition is in opposed phase. These effects
are specially shown jin the Eastern Archipelago, and in
the Anamba Islands, where the interference between the
two tides the ordinary and meridional is alternately one
of double phase and opposed phase, and the resulting
tide alternately the sum and difference of the two, the
semidiurnal and diurnal, so that wrhen the Sun is near
the solstice, then in these regions there is only one tide in
the 24 hours,though when at the equinoxes there are two.

317. — The diurnal inequality being due to a 21-hour
meridional tide of the equatorial rotational protuberance
accentuated by the longitudinal eccentric, all in the
manner indicated, we have in its effects on the
semi-diurnal ordinary tides the means of estimating
every condition of phase and phase production on the
tides of every region, as these are affected by the differ-
ent positions of the Moon and Sun.

318. — We are now in a position to show in one graphic
view Fig. 23 a simple, concise, and rational view of the
tides, that is of the ordinary oceanic tides, the semi-di-
urnal tides, without reference to the protuberant equator
force and diurnal inequality tides, and without reference
to tiio niDtions of the tides as they are affected by at-
mospheric and wind movements, and only in order that

hi

the tides may be embodied to the ordinary reader in as
simple a form as that of any hitherto given, but with
this proviso, that the figure only comprehends the main
features, and provides the base of a working theory,
around which may be built every detail of the whole
phenomena of the tides. The forces which give rise to
the ordinary tides are six, subtending successively the
arcs occupied by the oceanic eccentric as it is rotated
round the globe, viz. A B, P E, D H, K L, G F, M N. In
their entirety they may be viewed as four alternations of
east to west and west to east forces, acting on the eccen-
tric. As Cy the centre of gravity of the oceanic eccentric
is rotated under G F, M N, it moves westward out of the
radius CT1 and the waters are moved westward out of
Eastern Polynesia into Western Polynesia and at 8 a.m.
Tahiti time, the waters have developed a trough O and a
crest R to the east and west respectively of Tahiti (T.)
This trough and crest is the primary tide of the ocean as
at trough phase in Eastern Polynesia and crest phase in
Western Polynesia, and its radiations give rise to all the
tides of the globe. As the centre of gravity C' of the ec-
centric rotates under the force AB, the waters now acted
on by the west to east force AB, the crest R falls, at the
same time that by its pressure and the momentum of its
fall, it radiates westwards across the ocean. The trough
O also fills under the effects of the force A B and while
filling radiates its phase eastwards and along the western
coasts of America northwards and southwards and north-
wards and southwards over the Pacific. When we know
the hour and positions of the crest and trough R and O,
the tides and the positions of all the other crests and
troughs of the ocean are determined by the wave lengths,
which again are determined by the velocity of radiation.
At about 6 a.m. Tahitian time the primary tide of West-
ern Polynesia R is flowing fastest,and the primary tide of
Eastern Polynesia O is ebbing fastest but at 8 a.m. Tahiti
time it is slack water on both the primary tides, the
Eastern Polynesian trough O being now deepest, and
the Western Polynesian crest R highest, and what
may be denominated the radiant potential is a maximum
about T, in the tidal waves R and O. The forces G F,
M N, A B, and all the forces of the Figure act in the
plane of the ecliptic. The action of P E, D H, K L, is
similar to that of G F, M N, A B, but twelve hours later.
Thus if we take R as a position in Western Polynesia
in longitude 180° W. in the plane of the ecliptic, with the
Sun and Moon in New Moon conjunction at the time of

127

an equinox, then at 6 a.m. local time it is flow at R, at
12 noon it is ebb at B, again at 6 p.m. it is flow at R,
and at 12 midnight it is ebb at R, by the operation of
the forces of the Figure. The crest phase at the G#la-
pagos in 90° W. coincides and synchronises with that at
R 180 W., though the Galapagos is receiving its tidal
phase by radiation from O. Amid all these vibrations,
undulations, or oscillations of the ocean in Polynesia, the
Tahitian sea is a stationary node, and Tahiti immediately
above the centre of gravity of the eccentric C/, though it-
self the node, may be regarded in terms of an undulatory
theory of the tides, as the radiant-point-source of the
tidal waves.

319. — On the withdrawal of the force OF, MN, at 6 a.m.
Tahiti time, and the passage of Tahiti under the force AB,
the centre of gravity C' of the oceanic eccentric ceases
its east to west excursion, and returns back into CT, and
passes to the eastern side of C T. Hence the oscilations
of the ocean giving rise to the tides may be expressed in
those of the centre of gravity C' of the oceanic eccentric.
The effects are similar when C' is carried round into the
night hemisphere of the globe. Thus C7 effects a com-
plete to and fro oscillation every 12 lunar hours, from
ecliptic east to ecliptic west, and vice versa, or i.e. two
complete oscillations per tidal day.

320. — With the luminary at the solstice or in high de-
clination north or south, there is an ascending and de-
scending component of tidal throw producing a diurnal
inequality, in respect to the a.m. and p.m. tides.

321.— The force M N, G F, outweighs the force A B,
and the force P E, H D, outweighs the force K L, hence
the Western Polynesian tides R, outweigh the Eastern
Polynesian tides O. and the balance of impulse or mo-
mentum effected on the whole Earth is a Precessional
effect or rotation in the plane and direction MN, GF, DH,
P E. Thus the forces M N and D H have to be added to
those of P E and G F in the production of Precessional
and Nutational effects, but modified by A B and K L.

322. — The force A B is centripetal force of gravitation
acting on the mass of the ocean or eccentric directed
towards the luminary, the force P E is orbital force al-
ready fully considered, the force D H is centripetal force
on the eccentric C' directed towards the luminary, the
force KL is centrifugal force from the luminary, the
force G F is orbital force already fully considered, the
force MN is centrifugal force directed from the luminary,
and only at the quadratures of C/ with the luminary do

128

all these forces cease to act on the eccentric C/ at which
moment tidal force is only potential as wave phase, and
displacement of ocean level.

323. — Perhaps every consideration advanced in this
treatise has some weight with reference to tidal produc-
tion and tidal inequalities, but the main cause of the
tides, and without which they would practically cease to
exist, is the eccentric and protuberant position of the
ocean waters, and the throw of the eccentric CCV, that
throw of the ocean fluids \vhich conjoined with the throw
of the atmosphere and its ecliptic east to ecliptic west
circulation, gives rise to Precession of the Equinoxes,
Nutation, and Secular Retardation, but of which, Secular
Retardation is prevented from acting by the electric dis-
charge taking place on the globe, which latter acts to
rotate the globe with a force about equal to the retarding
forces of the Precessional and Tidal movements.

324. — In proportion as the electric rotation of the
globe acts through surface electric discharge affecting
the atmosphere and ocean, and that about the higher
latitudes and magnetic poles, to this extent it developes
west to east \vinds and currents and variable ten-
sion movements of the atmosphere in this direc-
tion in the higher latitudes, a movement aiding to de-
velope storms and convey these across the Atlantic from
west to east.

335. — Thus Precessional-Secular-Retardation on the
atmosphere is directed from east to west in the tropics,
Electro-magnetic Rotational Acceleration on the atmos-
phere is directed from west to east in the higher lati-
tudes, and the two systems of movement coming in con-
tact in the circles of Capricorn and Cancer develope
calm in these regions.

326. — Thus from what has gone before, it appears that
the calms of the equator are due to descending currents
on a low tension system of air movement embracing the
entire atmosphere, as illustrated in Fig. 24, the calms of
the tropics to the meetingof the lower meridional pole.going
and upper equator going currents of this system, and also
to the Precessional, RetarclaUonal, and Electro-Magnetic
Rotational currents directed respectively from east to
west, and west to east, of which the east to west or Pre-
cessional-Retardational air movements prevail in the
tropics, and the west to east or Electro-Magnetic Rota-
tional air movements prevail in the higher latitudes and
latitudes of the magnetic poles.

327, — Any view of the Tides of the Ocean, and move-

12!)

ments of the air which does not take into account elec-
tro-magnetic forces is incomplete, but gravitational con-
siderations are the chief considerations.

Fig. 5, showing circulation of the air at the
equator, viz , that of deecend'ng currents

^

Fig. 21. Diurnal Tidal Forces, at mid-day of th« Eccentric.

130

Fig. 22. Diurnal Tidal Forces at arid-night of the Oceanic Eccentric.

328. — The gravitational circulation of the atmos-
phere, shown in Fig. 24, as modified by the Earth's
rotation and the electro-magnetic forces which produce
the latter, is the chief circulation. B R, P P represent
the descending currents of the calms of the tropics of
Cancer and Capricorn, the meeting region of the upper
and lower currents of the atmosphere as shown and
the contact region of the east to west precessional, equa-
torial, ecliptic movement of the aii* under the forces P E,
G P, and west to east rotational high-magnetic-latitude
movement of the air under electric discharge in the terres-
trial magnetic field, not shown in the diagram ;TTTT the
trade winds losing themselves in the low tension poleward
going movement of the lower atmosphere, WE the equa-
tor made calm by descending currents which lose
their east - to - westing in descending in the low
tension movement which form the meridional loops
A B C D, which movement A B C D embraces the entire
atmosphere. Superposed upon the system shown in the
Fig. in the higher latitudes there are west to east going

131

air currents and movement of low tension but great
depth, due to electric discharge in the Earth's magnetic
field acted on by terrestrial magnetism, and serving to
maintain the Earth's rotation against the forces of Pre-
cession which acting alone would speedily remove the
rotation. Under these effects of electro-magnetic action
in our latitudes, storm centres almost invariably move
from west to east, and when there are brilliant displays
of aurora, the auroral arch visibly manifests in its west
to east rolling clouds, the electro-magnetic forces which
rotate the Earth, and act to move the air from west to
east. In all the atmospheric circulation of the nature of
wind or violent movement thermal convection appears
to play no direct part, although when long periods are
taken it may have some effects of air displacement, but
the latter even when seasonal variations are taken into
account, must be referred chiefly to gravitational forces
as dealt with in this treatise, including a a a a, Fig.24,thc
anti-trade winds. . M

ft'"*

a ct.vn

Fig, 23, The Tidal Forces,

132

V

iFig 24. Meridional Circulation of the Atmosphere.

329. — This treatise was intended to be fully published
in A. D. 1901, the year of the title page, and of the
earlier sheets, and these were handed by the writer to
our respected friend Mr Bowes their printer in that
year. But as I have proceeded with the M.S. new
views have presented themselves, and the manner of
obtaining these step by step, is largely indicated by the
text, which it is decided, shall stand as written ; the
more especially in order to exhibit to the reader, the
various stages of development of the further issues
which have resulted. The Atmospheric Circulation and
Oceanic Tides, the Precession of the Equinoxes and Nu-
tation of the Earth, involve complex questions, and to
evolve simplicity from complexity, and in many cases
ordar out of chaos, has not been an easy task, but the
writer relinquishes his pen with some measure of satis-
faction, some feeling of achievement, and of " something
Attempted, something done," but also the feeling that

133

had he known the perplexing and dimensional character
of the task placed before him, when setting out, he
would have shrunk from it in dismay, but having put
his hand to the plough, the author could not turn back
until he had accomplished a large portion of the work
set before himself, and such he adjudges, as shall change
the whole field of Natural Science, and prepare the
way for a new crop of developments. From the abstruse
and recondite character of the subjects and questions
involved, however important they may be, the writer
can scarcely hope to reach a large audience during his
lifetime, but as Pythagoras had to speak for hundreds of
years before he was heard, and Copernicus and Galileo
had also to die before their confirmatory words and dis-
coveries could prevail, so the writer of this treatise will
rest content even though his discoveries as revealed in
this treatise should not receive a better fate than did
those of the trio just named, but he also hopes, that they
may receive at least no worse.

330. — With the author's compliments to the printer
and all friends, and good wishes that a new and better
era in which knowledge may have its true place, dis-
persing the dark clouds of ignorance — may dawn upon
the world.

FINIS.

Ckristma*, 190%.

ERRATA.

DEDICATION, line 10, for justifition read justification.

P. 28. Hue 5, for westward read eastward.

P. *ll, s Ii4, Hue 3, for 50 read 5°.

P. 31, s K>5, Hue 6. for treatiue read treatise.

P. 36, Tables, See Errata to Tables on p. 43.

P. 37, line 31, for onter read outer.

P. 45-46. see Note at foot of Errata.

P. 55, s 167, line 2, for .53 read 5.3

P. 69, s 205, line 2, for bed read level.

P. 72, s 213, line 7, for hv read by.

P. 79, line 21, for 2 o'clock, read 8 o'clock.

P. 87, line 10, for evcept read except.

NOTE 1.

P. 45, s 146, for Fig. 6, take the left hand diagram of Fig. 3, p. 61.

NOTE 2.

There are a number of minor mistakes which being immaterial to the
arguments are allowed to remain uncorrected.

134

INDEX

WITH

COROLLARIES AND ADDENDA.

ACCELERATION of Earth's Rotation
by electro-magnetism, s 323 — 325
and context.

ACUTE PERCEPTION, common sense,
and ordinary mechanics, are before
mathematics in dealing with the
tides, s 273 and context.

ALPHABET of Precession, Nutation,
and Tidal Forces, Fig. 2, s 148.

ANGLE of Obliquity of Ecliptic, how
produced, s 182—185, 278 and
context.

ANTI-TRADE-WINDS, are due to
reaction from the trade winds, and
to magnetic deflection of the air,
s 283, 288, and context.

AlR Movements of the Globe are the
reverse of what thermal conditions
and gradients would require s 51
and context, and Fig 24, p. 13, air
alternately passed into Northern
and Southern hemispheres, s 39,
compress of air by Earth's rotation,
s 42 windward and leeward side of
continents s 43.

APSIDAL error of Newton s 226, tidal
errors of Newton s 226.

APART from an eccentric position and
eq uatorial protuberance of the ocean
the latter can have no tide but must
move as if it were part of the solid
Earth, s 203, the Atlantic waters
do so move s 257 — 262.

ARCTIC CIRCLE, is the circle of lati-
tude of minimum barometric pres-
sure s 115 and context.

ATLANTIC possesses no tides of its
own development bnt only what it
receives from Polynesian waters,
s 257 — 262 and context.
ATMOSPHERIC CIRCULATION due
primarily to orbital forces P E, G F,
s 22 and context, and forces A B,
D H, KL, MN, Fig. 23 and context,
aided by tidal compress and the
Earth's rotation, s 186, and context,
and in its main generation is the re-
verse of what thermal conditions
would require s 1 — 330,and entirely

due to gravitational and electro-
magnetic forces s 1 — 330, the pri-
mary low tension system being that
of the loops of Fig. 24.
ATMOSPHERIC TIDES, due to forces
P E, G F, A B, D H, K L. M N, and
a prolific cause of winds of diurnal
period, s 1 — 330.

BAROMETER, distribution of air in re-
lation to the plane of the ecliptic
s 179 to the equator s 116, to at-
mospheric circulation s 187, and
context.

BAROMETRIC PRESSURES, the differ
ences of air pressures over the globe
are the reverse of what thermal ac-
tion by the Sun would effect s 52
and context

BAROMETRIC minimums of the Earth
are on the Arctic Circles, 111 — 114
and context.

BAROMETRIC diurnal minimum of the
Earth is where the Ecliptic cuts the
Equator s 57 and context.
BENTHAL parish, Broseley, Sropshire,
the birthplace of the author of this
treatise, s 142, p. 42, born in the
year of the Great Crystal Palace
London Exhibition, for which the
author's father (a foreman dresser
of pioneer or olden school type in
the Coalbrookdale Ironworks) pre-
pared many beautiful castings
CALCIUM character of the lunar moun-
tains s 142, p. 38.
CALMS of Equator, dne to descending

air s 186 and context.
CALMS of Cancer and Capricorn due
to horizontal impacts of air and de-
descending air s 186, 326 and con-
text.

CENTRE OF GRAVITY, is the centre of
force of a mass, and the point to-
wards which gravity and weight
constantly increases as the point is
approached, in a ratio not less than
that of the law of inverse squares
s 142 and context. The centre of
gravity is subject to a diurnal varia-

135

tion of position in the Earth, rota-
ting in this period round the centre
of form s 142 and context.

CENTRE OF GRAVITY of the ocean is
eccentrically situated in the globe
s 268 and context. Is subject to
oscillation in the tidal intervals
g 311 — 315 and context. Its mean
position is under Tahiti s 302 and
context. Its movements express
the semi-diurnal and diurnal tidal
forces or motions s 302 — 322 and j
context,

CENTRIFUGAL eccentricity of the ocean
by the Earth's rotation, or its pro-
tuberance on the equator, aided by
its meridional geographical eccen-
tricity, acted on by gravitation of
the Moon and Sun, is the cause of !
the diurnal tides s 315 — 317.

CCMETS owe their shape to electro-
magnetic induction by solar magnet-
ism. Cor to s 283.

COMPRESS of air and ocean by tidal
forces, s 186 and context.

CONFLICT and change, the law of the
atmosphere and weather, s 2 — 330

CONTINENTAL dams, and the tides,
s 270 and context.

CONVECTION. Thermal convection sim-
plicity is not the law of the atmos-
pheric movements, s 1 — 12

COSMICAL source of winds s 1.

CRATER. No volcanic craters in the
Moon, s 142, p. 38

CURRENTS of the ocean are directed
from ecliptic east to < cliptic west in
the tropics producing Secular Ke-
tardation. and Precession, are pole-
going currents on the eastern or
windward side of continents ; and
equator going currents on the west-
ern or leeward side of continents,
s 1—330.

CURRENTS of the Atmosphere, are a
descending current of air over the
whole of the equator and tropics, a
pole going movement of air in the
entire lower strata, a movement, to-
wards the equator in the entire
upper strata, together forming the
low tension system of Atmospheric
Circulation, with secondary descend-
ing currents in the circles of Cancer
and Capricorn producing the pres-
sure which gives rise to the trade
winds and an ti- trades the two latter
a high tension system only affecting

the base of the atmosphere and los-
ing itself by impact and friction in
the great low tension loop system of
Fig.24, p. 132. These low tension and
high tension systems are both modi-
fied by that of the electro- magnetic
deflection s 325 and context, and
also by the east to west force of
P E, G F, and meridional force of
AB, DH, KL, MN, Fig. 23.

DASIS, formed by Old and New World

Continents, to tidal and wind effects

of the Precessional impact of the

fluids of the ocean and air, s 242,283

and context.

DEDICATION of this treatise to the
masses, p. 3.

DESCENDING air of Equator, Tropics,
Cancer and Capricorn, s 187,
and context.

DESIGN and Creation the law of the

Universe, not growth and evolution,
s 142 and context.

DIRECT action of Moon and Sun on the
ocean waters to raise a tide, s 301.

DIURNAL rotation of the Earth pro-
duced and maintained by electric
discharge in the terrestrial magnetic
field, s 290.

DIURNAL tides, are due to eccentric
positions of the ocean basins, and
the equatorial protuberance of water
arising from the Earth's rotation,
acted on by the Moon and £un, and
to the greatest degree when these
bodies are at the solstices, and i.e.,
1o the same forces which acting on
the protuberant air of the equator
and oceanic basins, produce the
Monsoons, the diurnal tides and the
Monsoons having a similar half-
yearly variation of force and direc-
tion, s 314 and context.

DOLDRUMS, aie calms and humidity
due to descending air, s 326& context

DYNAMO, the Sun is an electro-mag-
netic dynamo m an arrangement
of ordinary ponderable matler.s 142

EARTH is sr.l-j* rr t^> forces which re-
move rotation, s i5-- JT.r>. which
impart rotation, s 285 — 2^7, and
contest, and from season to season
IOFS and gain are alternating by
small fractions, but the mean
value remains practically constant.
Telescopic observations of transits
appear to show the variationsunder
the Tidal forces,and by the forces of

136

Precession and Secular Retardation
acting alone the Earth would cease
to rotate in less than 3000 years,
s 287 and context.

EARTH'S centre of gravity,and that of
the air particles, and all each to
each, are orbitally impelled about
the primary the Moon and Sun in
different directions, s 59, the centre
of gravity of the Earth and its fluids
are differently directed, s 268 and
context.

EAST to WEST movement of the entire
mass of the Atmosphere in the
tropics, s 56.

EASTERN POLYNESIA — primary tide
thereof, s 3 1 8 aud context.

ECCENTRIC position of the ocean the
cause of the tides, s 268, of the
oceanic basins the cause of the di-
urnal tides and monsoon winds,s314
and context.

ECLIPTIC, is the mean plane of the
tidal forces, s 1—330.

ECLIPSES and storms, s 364.

EGOTISM. The author is quite conscious
of his own egotism,or individualism,
but would balance this against en-
throned stupidity on the part of
certain astionomers and scholars,
who are either unwilling or unable
to take up the questions involved in
this treatise.

ELECTRIC currents maintain the Earth's
rotation, s 288,prop.39,and context.

ELECIRO-MAGNETIC source of the
solar radiation, s 142, of the Earth's
rotation, s 288, of the planetary ro-
tations, s 2b7-294, and context, of
comets, s 325, of the Sun's heat
and radiation, s 142, Electrons,
positive and negative, pursue the
path of the electric current in
opposite directions respectively,and
possess intense energies of rotation
and gyration. In an electric current
the electrons or electric particles
adhere to the circuit by gy ra-
tional bombardment, an electro mag-
netic gravitation as it were. Cor.
tojs 142. Cor. The electric par-
ticles maybe thrown into oscillation
or vibratory wave motion when
transiting the circuit, the particles
composing the wave cohering by
gyrationai bombardment of each
other, and of the ponderable matter
composing the circuit.

ELLIPSOIDAL, egg-shaped, or prolate
spheroid view of the tides entirely
untenable and unsound, s 231 and
context.

EQUATOR, is a region of descendin g air
s326 calms of, due to air descent si 86

ETHER is the principal source of gra-
vitation s 142

ETHER obeys the laws of gases, s 142

EVANESCENT axis of Precessional Ro-
tation, s 286.

EVKNING, calms of, s 91.

EXPERIMENTAL demonstration that
electric discharge rotates the globe,
s 299, prop. 40, and context.

EXPERIMENTAL pendulum demonstra-
tion that gravitation increases to the
Earth's centre, s 142 Cor. Pit ex-
periments and Polar observations
with pendulum show ihis.

FLOOD of Noah, produced by a ring or
rings of the Earth, resembling those
of the planet Saturn, and the addi-
tion of wnich to the body of the
globe, terminated the ice age, s 142

FORCE is due only to the movement of
matter, and all force is kinetic in its
origin, or i e. we may regard all
marifestatious of force as a mode
of motion, s 227.A11 force is motion
of matter either in continuation, in
exchange, in transference, in tran-
slation, in action, or in reaction,
s 227-274. The laws of force are
the laws of motion, the effects of
force are the effects of motion, mat-
ter is that in which force or motion
resides, space is that in which force,
or motion operates, s 227-274. con-
text and corrollary. Thus force is
a property of matter, and is that
property which we denominate mo-
tion. The greatest reservoir offeree
with which we are cognisant is the
elementary rotations and gyrations
giving rise to gravitation, s 142 and
context.

FORCES. The forces which produce
Precession of the Equinoxes, Secular
Retardation, and the Atmospheric
Circulation, aie identical with those
which produce the tides and currents
of the ocean, the forces PE, GF,AB,
DH, KL, MN of Fig. 1, 23, other
Figs, and context. Cor: These forces
more especially PE, GF, are the
forces which produce the principle
perturbations of the lunar- terrestrial

137

orbit, the Motion of the Apsides,
Evectlon, Variation, and Annual
Equation, and act in the contrary
direction to that of the action to
which these variations are usually
assigned. In the second and fourth
quadrants of the orbit PE. GF act
to elongate the radius vector, in the
fiist and third quadrants they act to
contract the radius vestor, according
as the forces are carrying the Moon
and Earth to a point without or with-
in the mean orbit. From quadrature
to conjunction PE, GF are directed
outwards and act to expand the or-
bit and elongate its radius-vector-
diameter from conjunction to
quadrature PE, GF are directed
inwards and act to contract the or-
bit and shorten its radius-vector-
diameter at the quadratures, all in
accordance with tabled observations.
The reader can easily construct a
figure to illustiate this, or deduce
it from the various Figures of this
treatise.

FUNDAMENTAL view of the Tides s 198

FIGURES. Fig. 1 p. 44, 2 p. 47,3 p. 61
4 p. 64, 5, 6, p. 61, 7,8, 9,10, p.91
11, 12, p. 115, 13, 14, p. 116, 15,
16, 17, p. 118, 18, 19, 20, p. 119,
21, p 22, p. 23, p. 24, p. 25, p.

GALAPAGOS. Two tides originate in
Eastern Polynesii and entering the
Galapagos radiate polewards and
eastwards, s 233 and context.

GENEALOGY of John Jones, Author of
this Treatise, s 142, p. 42.

AUTOBIOGRAPHY of author,see Addenda.

GF. and PE, orbital forces, Figs. 1 7,
8, 9, 10, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20,and
context.

GLACIERS, are the fountains of the
deep spoken of by Moses in the
account of the Flood, s 1 42.

GRAVITATION is an induced and vari-
able force resembling magnetism,
and variable according to location of
mass with respect to other masses,
s 142 and context. Is not a "feeble
force" as commonly supposed but
the Giant of the Universe in
strength, and the source of all pon-
derable manifestations of energy,
s 172, Cor. Cohesion is a variable
force, and for a given density of
matter is greatest in the greatest
globes or masses.

GYRATION. Rotations and gyrations
of elementary matter, the cause
of gravitation, s 142 and context.
Cor (a) The smallest gravitational
unit, practically a mathematical
point of matter, contains an energy
of rotation whose kinetic value ex-
ceeds that of the motion of the stare
in their courses. The interlocked
rings of matter of a single moleoule
contain an energy practically in •
finite. The ultimate constitution of
matter is that of absolutely rigid
aud indestructible interlocked rings,
rotating on their space axes with a
velocity which is practically infinite.
[We use the word infinite because
it covers the quantity of energy,
but as a matter of fact, the energy
possesses limits, but only in the
sense that? the universe may possess
limits, and doubtless does. Beyond
this universe the Great Creator may
have many Universes, not construc-
ted of matter as we know it, but
entirely different to this, and doubt-
less has such, but with these we
have no immediate concern. 3y
matter the author of course includes
the ether or ethers of space, and the
two kinds of matter whose dissocia-
tion produces the opposite electrici-
ties ; as well as that most cognisant
to our senses. However deep we
may dip it is the author's wish only
to deal with what may be brought
under the domain of observation for
the purposes of practical utility in
life, and elevation of mind.]
Cor. (c) The manifestations of force
or mttion generally have arisen and
do arise from the elementary rota-
tions and gyrations.

Cor. (d) The arrangements of the
interlocking of the elementary mat-
ter determine the size and form of
molecules.

Cor. (e) Molecules are bubbles of
matter whose walls cohere by contact,
and whose intermural interstices
contain illimitable motions and en-
ergies. The manifestions of force
indicate the character of these en-
ergies. The sides of the bubbles
are very elastic. The elasticity dif-
fers for different substances and
modifications. In relation to elas-
ticity this Cor. may be regarded as

138

a bubble theory of tbe cbemical
units, although there are subdivi-
sions if we could analyse to further
simplicity, which would reduce the
number of chemical elements, at the
same time that it extended the
powers of synthesis.

Cor. (f) A great central force of
gravity, the chemical bond as it
were, is found at the point of con-
tact of the units of two bubbles, to-
gether forming one Dalton unit of
the substance, and towards which
force of cohesion both bubbles
contribute. This cohesion is
due to gyrational bombardment in
which the ma' ter of each wall seeks
to pierse that of the other, but can-
not break away from its own inter-
lockings. Subdivision and analysis
of the molecular bubbles to obtain
more elementary bubbles must be the
great aim of chemistry. flhe atomic
theory must go,even if we retain its
nomenclature and lesults with re-
spect to equivalence and multiple
proportions. We have not reached
the atom, and never shall unless to
the mind : As well may we expect
to see the most distant star, and
comprehend the universe, and weigh
it in a balance. Finality maj be our
aim but it can never be attained,
and the expectation of a perfect
simplicity (see s 279) must go for
ever. "Art is long and life is
short" must ever be our experience.
Cor. (g) Gravitational gyrations
of matter radiate their bombard-
ments through space from mass to
mass, and gravitational unit to unit,
in a manner not unlike the radia-
tions of wave motion, and which
gravitational radiations may in part
partake of wave motion, hence the
law that velocity of fall varies as the
square of the distance from the at-
tracting body. Necessarily the den-
sity of the compressible giavitating
units is greatest at the centres of
force, but the variations of density
may affect the ether rather than
ponderable matter, though both
must be affected in so far as ponder-
able matter can yield to the com-
press, but the greatest range of com-
pressibility appears to be possessed
by the ether, though even it may

have its limits in fluidity and solid-
ity, as manifested at the centres of
amass. The condensations ofbal1
lightning appear to indicate that tht,
ether can acquire a fluid or solid
state, in a manner resembling the
liquifactions and solidifying oi air
and other gases.

HARMONY. The greatest manifestation
of force in the universe, including
the movements of the stars in their
courses, are octavely harmonious,
with Doh-me-soh and other chords,
because light and sound are identi
cal, light being the transverse vibra-
tions of sound, and sound being the
longitudinal vibrations of light, and
both sets of vibrations always pre-
sent in a wave of either, and be-
cause harmonious octaval manifes-
tions of motion, or force possess the
greatest power of combination and
persistence under superposition, and
therefore outweigh all others and
possess the greatest longevity. Thun-
der is a note or sound of such super-
positions, and regarding light and
sound as identical, the thunder-
storms of the Earth and Universe
with the accompanying lightning
may be regarded as " the music of
the spheres." Cor. s 1 to 330.
HORACE and the winds, s 92.
HURRICANES, how caused, s 104 and

context.

HEAT and light of the Sun radial es to
our Earth the energies of terrestrial
rotation, winds, and tides, but the
three latter are not due to thermal
convection, but to gravitation and
electro magnetism in the manner
shown in this treatise, and theimal
convection plays diiectly an inappre-
ciabh part in the Atmospheric
winds and in the currents of the
ocean, s 53,283,288, context & cors.
IOK AGE, caused by rings of water
formerly round the Earth, resem-
bling those of Saturn, s 142 and
cor. The intermediate ring of greatest
mass probably locked up the entire
waters of the globe as ice, placed
the ice over the continents, produced
universal darkness over the globe,
and destroyed all life upon the
globe. This was the condition of
the globe immediately preced
ing the creation recorded in

139

Gen. ch. 1, and from which chaotic
condition that creation delivered it.
The last of the added rings, was of
less magnitude, and only partially
destroyed the life of the globe, a? d
terminated in the flood of Noah.
The Zodiacal Light, appears to be a
ring of hydrogen round the globe,
the last of the rings,and whoseinevi-
table descent upon the surface of
the Earth will probably enwrap it
in fire, and again destroy all life
from the globe. This event may
come at any moment. Indication
have been present in the ZODIACAL
LIGHT to show that.it has already
made contact with the external
limits of our atmosphere.
IMPACT of the Atmosphere and Ocean
against the solid Earth, orbital, and
in respect to the diurnal rotation
produces the tides, s 271 — 330, and
context.

INCLINATION of the Earth's equator to
the Ecliptic, is determined and pro-
duced by those forces which give
rise to Precession, Secular Retarda-
tion, Mutation, the Atmospheric
Circulation, and the Tides, s 278
and context.
INFINITE. The power of rotation and
gyration in the elements, illimitable
in greatness as actually existing.
s 142 and Cor.

INTERLUDE, s 125—142. Deluded fol-
lowers of unscrupulous statesmen
and legislators, s 128, of interested
politicians, and bloodsucking brew-
ers, distillers, and murdering pub-
licans, s 129, of priestly ignorance,
s 130, of the Pope, s 131, of pseudo
-scientific creeds and dogmas, s 132
—134.

JUSTIFICATION. Read justification for
justifition. Dedication p. 3. line 11.
KEPLER,his profound intuitions, s 139
KINETIC. The forees of Precession,
Secular Retardation, Nutation, At-
mospheric Circulation, and theTides,
are kinetic movements of the fluids
of the ocean, air, and the solid
Earth, modified by electro-magnetic
forces, s 278, Prop. 1, Cor. 9, and
context.
KINETIC theory of matter, s 227—274

and context.

KINETIC theory of force s 227 and
context.

LAWS of electricity and magnetism,
are those of gravitation including
cohesion, s 171 and context.
LIGHT and HEAT of the Sun are pro.
duced in the solar orb by mechanical
movements ef aggregated ponderable
matter, whose two or oioie aggrega-
tions are moved in opposite direc-
tions with reciprocating or alterna1
ting motion s 293, Prop. 43, and
context. The mechanical inovei
ments in the Sun are those of mag-
netised matter, or matter largely
magnetised, and such as to consti-
tute the Sun an electro-magnetic
dynamo, s 293, Prop. 44 — 46, and
context. These discoveries and
views may be denominated The
Mechanical or Gravitational Theory
of Solar Energy and Radiation, or
the Electro Dynamo Theory of the
Sun, the reciprocating movements
beneath the photosphere of the Sun
and comprehending the entire mass
including the photosphere, being
produced by gravitation, acting on
potential of position of the two or
more aggregated masses. The two
masses or chief masses reciprocate
in a period of time 1, 1 second of
ordinary solar time of the terrestrial
tropical day, or i.e. 1. 1 second of
any ordinary clock or watch.
LIVY and the weather, s 92.
LONGITUDINALLY, the tides near the
tropics are quadrantly distributed,
and not diametrically or oppositely
as heretofore regarded, s 247 and
context.

LUTHER, his great doctrine in Dedica-
tion p. 3. Read justification for
justifition, line 11

MAGNET. The Sun a poweiful magnet
s 142, Cor. Comet tails are develop*
ed by electro-magnetic induction
of the Sun acting on the moving
conducting mass of the comet. In-
teraction of the developed electric
currents in the cornet producing
gyrational bombardment and mag-
netic attraction of the electric units
retains the comet tail from going to
pieces. Centrifugal force in the
orbit sometimes overcomes the in«
ternal electro-magnetic cohesion of
the comet and the comet breaks iuto
two or more parts. Not on account
of its mass, out on account of ita

140

electric discharge, collision of the
globe and an electrically moving
comet would be a serious matter,
but in approaching the globe there
is repulsion by induction between
the globe and comet so that collision
is probably rendered impossible, un-
less the cometary matter first lose its
coherence, or becomes broken up
into very small meteorites with al-
most circular orbits about the Sun.
In this connection the Earth's selec-
tion of cosmic matter will be prefer-
entially for that which moves in
orbits about the Sun which are ap-
proximately circular, and possess a
minimum induction by solar mag'
netism. Thus if the Earth and plan,
ets have grown or do grow by addi-
tion of matter from cosmic space,
this addition tends to remove any
eccentricity of orbit on the part of
tke globe about the Sun, or to
retain the orbits approximately cir«
circular. Of course the writer ret
gards the planets as having been
projected from the Sun, and in the
course of time as returning to collision
with the Sun, to be projected again
and created anew in respect to the
major portion of their mass. The
solar system of planets appears to
have been formed by two such pro-
jections at separate epochs.

MAGNETISM. Its relation to gravitation.
8 171 and context.

MAGNETISATION of stellar and solar
light in the terrestrial atmosphere
producing double refraction thereof,
with superposition and interference
between the resulting rays is the
source of stellar and solar scintillation.
s 142 and Cor.

MERIDIAN. Meridional eccentricity of
the ocean geographical and by cen-
trifugal force of the Earth's rotation
acted on by the Moon and Sun is
the cause of the diurnal tidal
inequality, s 3 20 and context. Cor. (a)
The old world dain to movements
of the Indian Ocean, and the eccen-
tric position of the latter, gives rise
to the diurnal tides and Monsoons
of these regions. Cor1 (b.) The At-
lantic being symetrical or nearly so
on its meridian with respect to north
and soutk, can possess no diurnal
tiU« of its own development.

MIST. Mist was universal, hiding the
Sun's disc in the Ice age immediate-
ly before the flood of Noah, s 142
and Cor.

MOON. The times of New and Full
Moon are the times of the greatest
Processional, Nutational and Secu-
lar Ketardational movements, and
the times of the greatest storms,
earthquakes, and electric manifesta-
tions, by reason of the gravitational
movements of the fluids of the globe
and their eccentric being greatest at
these epochs, s 1 — 33@ and Cor,

MOON and weather, si 4, 92 & context.

MOSAIC COSMOGONY, that of Genesis,
and including the Creation and the
Flood, stands unshaken, and the
doctrines of Darwin and Evolution
are untrue, s 142 and Cor-s.

MOTION. Motion of matter in relation
to the mechanics of the universe and
th« inanimate forces of nature, can
only be produced from motion of
matter, and motion of matter and
force are identical, and there can be
neither without the other, and all
manifestations of force, are manifes-
ations of motion of matter, or to de-
fine the proposition as a theory, we
may say Every FORCE is A MODE
OP MOTION OP MATTER, s 227, 274,
context and Cors.

MONSOONS, in and about the Indian
Ocean, are winds caused by the same
forces which acting on the waters of
the ocean produce the diurnal tides,
which forces act in excess in the solar
day hemisphere of the globe, so that
the monsoons represent accumulated
diurnal effects, oppositely directed
in alternate half years,and synchron-
ating in period with tht variations
of diurnal tidal phase with respect
to night and day in alternate half
years. From the Vernal Equinox
to the Autumnal the force acts on
the fluids of the Indian O^ean, the
air and water, from South to North,
and is greatest at the Snnimer Sol-
stice, from the Autumnal Equinox
to the Vernal, the force acts from
North to South, in respect to the
equatorial protuberance of the fluids
near India and the eccentric position
of the waters of the oceanic basia to
the south of India. Thermal action
plays no direct part to produce tha

141

Monsoons, but gravitational electric
convection or i.e, translation of elec-
tricity by the air movement at the
time of the Monsoons proper, acts to
generate thunder-storms and rain
accompanied by cyclonic conditions
and wind, s 1 — 130, context & Cors.

MONSOONS. The Monsoon gravitational
convection of air by the Sun, aided
by the Moon at certain times, is
accompanied by the convection oi
electricity, promoting electric explo-
sions ; and these electric effects with
the accompanying typhoons and hur-
ricanes occur to the greatest extent
in those regions into which there is
a continual iupouring of air from
warmer parts of the globe, with
condensation of the electrically
charged aqueous vapour and accum-
ulation of electric charge and tension.
This is an important weather prin-
ciple in connection with the parts
affected by the Monsoons and of the
globe generally, and will largely in-
dicate the features of the atmos-
pheric circulation.

NE\VTON and gravitation, a 135 — 141
and context. Principia needs revision
B 140, 141, 176, and context.
Newton often in error s 126, 135,
175,226, 230, 277; 278, context
and Cors. Newton's simplic.ty, s 279
—280.

NODES. Tahitian waters the tidal node
of the ocean, s 300—318 & context.

NODES of the Lunar -terrestrial orbit,
their retrogression affects the At-
mospheric Circulation, Winds, and
Oceanic Tides, and th.3 movements
of the solid Earth in Precession,
Natation, and Rotation, 8293—322,
and context.

NUTATION is due to the intervariation
of the forces which r reduce the At*
mospheric circulation, OceanicTides,
Precession, and Terrestrial Rotation,
B 278, Prop. 1, Cor. 8, and context.
Kinetics of Nutation, s 144—287,
and context

NINETEENTH CENTUSY Victorian and
Christmas Announcements of the
Author, s 142.

OBLIQUITY of the Ecliptic : — limiting
angle, how determined, s 278. Prop.
1, Cor. 1 & 6-

OCEANIC CURRENTS are not produced
by thermal action but are produced

by gravitational movements of the
air and water by the Moon and Sun,
s 1 to 330, & Cors, (i.e. the oceanic
currents are windal and tidal, and
produced directly in no other way,
thermal convection being too slight
to appreciably affect the horizontal
directions of movement. By windal
and tidal we include barometric
effects.)

OCEANIC TIDES, their general character
1 — 330, their character in respect
to the Galapagos or Eastern Poly-
nesian cradle and radiation, B 210*—
322 in respect to the Western Poly-
nesian cradle and radiation a 300 —
322, superposition of the Eastern
and Western radiations, differing in
phase by 12 hours or a tidal interval,
at the southern entrance of the At-
lantic s 309, Fig. 17, p. 118, con-
text and Cors. Affected by many
influences, s 276 and context.

ORBITAL FORCE, the force P E, G F
of this treatise, is the predominant
immediate cause of the Atmospheric
Circulation s 22, its character, s 23
and context, and acting through the
fluid eccentric of our planet, is the
predominant cause of the tides both
Oceanic and Atmospheric, s 300 and
context.

OsciLLLA/rioff in the planes of the
Ecliptic of the centre of gravity of
the ocean or fluid ecceniric gives
rise to or i.e. expresses the semi-
diurnal tides, s 300 — 322 & context
and oscillation of the waters of the
ocean in a plane or planes rectangu-
lar to that of the ecliptic and aided
by the equatorial protuberance of
the ocean gives rise to the diurnal
tide or tides, s 314 and context,

PACIFIC, tidal swing thereof, s 252.

PASSIIVTY of Newtonian Philosophy
s 293.

PKNDULUM quickens its vibration as
the centre of the Earth is approached
e.g. down mines, and on the flattened
poles of the Earlh, and in the latter
case beyond what is referable to
iucreased weight due to absence of
equatorial rotation and centrifugal
force. This can only be explained
by gravitation being a central force
increasing all the way to the centre
of gravity. No other explanation
will bear examination for a single

moment, s 142 and context.

PLANETARY Tables of Astronomical
Text Books, the Newtonian ones
entirely irrational and erroneous,
s 142, p. 36.

PLANETS. The planets of the solar
system whose rotational periods are
known, are all cool magnetic globes
with ocean, atmosphere, and electric
reactions, and resemble the Earth,
s 142, context and cors.

POLE of barometrical effects, s 186,
Fig. 4, and context. Geographic and
mean magnetic pole caincide, s 287,
and context.

POLARISATION of the Oceanic Tides,
s 193, and context.

POLYNESIA, is the cradle of the Tides,
and these radiate from a region of
which Tahiti is the centre and node,
with a primary undulation in East-
ern and Western Polynesia respect-
ively, s 300—322 and context.

PORTRAITS of Author of this Treatise,
Frontispiece. See also Addenda for
Autobiography of Author, and de-
scription in relation to physiology
and phrenology.

PRECESSION and Secular Retardation
Forces are to each other as Gas2 ob-
liquity of the Ecliptic is to Sin2 ob-
liquity, s 166, are directed through
the node of the Ecliptic and Equator
8 182, and produce the observed ob-
liquity of the Ecliptic, si 83. Pre-
cession and Nutation can be made to
determine the kinetic and dynamic
quantities of the tidal forces, s 199.
Precession is duo to a nodal meridic^n
component of orbital force, s 159.
Mean plane of Processional or orbital
force. Piie cession is a rotation of the
Earth on an evanescent geographical
axis,coiriciding with the ecliptic axis
regarded as the space axis of rotation,
s 15 '2 and context. Kinetics of Pre-
cession s 143 — 257 and context.

PiiECESSTONAL Force, mean plane there-
of is the Ecliptic plane, s 147 and
context.

PRESSURE. Distribution of barometric
pressure, s 115 and context; how
arising, s 186 & context. Barometric
pressures^-and — ,secondary to the con-
vection of air by the low tension pri-
mary circulation of the Atmosphere,
are the cause of the high tension
winds of the lower strata of the air,

sit o 335, and cor.

PROPOSITIONS of Newton's Principia
often false, s 140, 141, 175, 226,278
and context.

PROPOSITIONS of the Author, 1 p. 96, 2
to 49, p. 102—114.

PROTUBERANCE of the ocean on the
Equator along with its eccentricity
gives rige to the diurnal tides, s314
—317.

PROTUBERANT solid equator, acted on
by gravitation is not the cause of Pre-
cession, s 278 and context, but fluid
forces are the cause, a 143 — 160 and
context.

PRIMARY forces of the Atmospheric
Circulation and Oceanic Tides and
Currents, are those which produce
Precession and Nutation, of which
the orbital forces P E,G F of Fig. 1,
p.44 and con. are the principle,alorg
with the electro - magnetic forces
which rotate the Earth in the diurnal
rotation, s 1 to 335.

PRIMARY tides of the ocean.s 318—322

PRINCIPIA of Newton needs revision,
s 139—141.

QUADRANTAL forces the cause of the
Tides, s 318 and con.

QUADRATURE. The 6 a.m. and 6 p.m.
positions of Tahiti is the time at
which the primary tide of Western
Polynesia is flowing fastest, and sim-
ultaneously the primary tide of East-
ern Polynesia is ebbing fastest, and
both primary tides are then at their
mean height, viz. that of the level of
the ocean, s 318.

RADIANT or Undulatory Theory of the
Tides, p. 1 1 8, s 300 and con.

RAINBOW. The Earth was in the Ice
Age,and enwrapped in mist,whenthe
Ark was abuilding, and there was no
rainbow in the years immediately be-
fore the Flood, s 142, p. 39.

REST. Tahitan Sea is a node of Tidal
rest, 304 and con.

RETARDATION of Earth'sRotation,s 287
and con. Is compensated by electio-
magnetism, 288 — 289. Retardation
of the Atmosphere, s 188 and con, is
compensated by terrestrial magnet-
ism, s 168 and con.

RETROGRESSION and revolution of Lun-
ar-terrestrial nodes,how caused, s 295
— 297, and con.

REVOLUTION. Every reader must at once
see that if the doctrines of this treak-

143

ise are true, even f only with respect
to gravitation being a^centra!T force
then all natural science must be very
carefully revised ^and reconstructed
but this should not appal astronomers
and scientists who are so accustomed
to deal with revolutionary raovc
ments. Alike in dealing with the
Moon and Sun and Stars, and with
particles, elementary aggregations,
and molecules, we must look for re-
volutionary movements and expect
them. Students must demand that
the doctrine of gravitation a central
force must be considered.
ROEMKK-BKADLEY Ellipse of Mutation
s 295— *297 and con., is tb»3 key to
Atmospheric movements and changes
s 296 and con.

ROTATION. Earth rotates in Precession
on the ecliptic axis, s 150 — 152, act-
ually rotates simultaneously oti three
rectangular axes, the solstitial,nodal,
and polar, s 150 — 154, in a manner
such that one of these rotations is
opposed to and would speedily re-
move the diurnal^rotation did not
some other force maintain the latter,
s 154, and s 287—290 and con., ro-
tates in Precession «n the ecliptic
axis with a variable velocity, slowest
when the obliquity of the ecliptic is
least, greatest when t,he obliquity is
greatest, s 293 — 297? and con,
ROTATION of the Earth, aids the orbital
or tidal forces to produce the Atmos-
pheric Circulatior. s 108 — 110.
ROTATIONAL forces. The forces rotating
the planets in their diurnal rotations
vary inversely as the square oi
their distance from the Sun, being
proportionate to the amount of solar
light and heat received, and the ro
tational forces act acceleratingly un-
til the planet rotates in equilibruim
with the retard ing forces, which lat
ter vary inversely as the cube of the
distance from tne Sun, s 297, Prop.
51 and con.

SARSERAW, a wind swirl round the At-
lantic, s 45 — 47 which greatly affects
the weather of Britain, s 66—84.
SATURN'S rings, resemble those which
produced the Ice Age and the
Flood of Noah, 9 142, p. 39.
SCIENTISTS of the closet, and lunar in-
fluence on the weather, s 93 — 94.
SECOND law of Motion and Cor. 20.
Prop. 66, book 1 Principia, cannot

both be true, s 278, Prop. 1, Cor. 11
SECULAR RETARDATION s 162, the froces
acting to produce Secular Retarda-
tion outweigh those acting to pro-
duce Precession, s 284, Prop.36 — 37
and are sufficient to stop the Earth's
rotation in less than 3000 years if
not compensated, s 285 — 287.
SEGJJENTAL character of Tidal waves,

s 304 and con.

SHMJ-DIURNAL Tides due to meridional
eccentricity of the ocean, s 314-317.
SELENITE. Calcium-Carbonate andsel-
enite derived from its mineralisation,
are the materials of the surface of
SELENA the Moon, and in keeping
with the theory of design in the
Universe, are the best materials for
a lunar face, for giving light to the
world and the knowledge of past
history of the lunar-terrestrial system
s 142, p. 38 and Cor. The coral
structure of the lunar face is in
keeping with creative design not
natural evolution, s 142 and Cor.
SOLAR CIRCULATION of the Photosphere
resembles that of our Atmosphere,s 106
SOLID Equatorial Protuberance of the
Earth, cannot effect Precession of the
Equinoxes, s 278, Prop. 1. The force
producing Precession is an impact of
fluids, s 278, Prop. 1, Cor. 5.
SOLSTITIAL influence of the Sun on tidal
piling of the air and production of
hurricanes, s 104.
SPHERIOD. The Tides are not an elipsoid

or prolate spheriod, s 211 and con.
STARS are all electro-magnetic dynamo
whose mechanics resemble those o
the Sun, i.e. are bodies whose inter-
ior are two or more magnetic masses
making rectilineal or elliptic orbits
about the centre or centres of gravity,
or masses of world dimensions with a
lapidly rotating nucleus or nuclei,
s 142, p. 43. The light of stars is
double refracted in the terrestrial at-
mosphere by magnetisation of the
light, s 142. p. 43.

STRATA. The lower strata of the Atmos-
phere move from the Equatoi to the
Poles,the upper strata from the Poles
to the Equator, as the primary sys-
tem of circulation by the gravitation ,
al forces of the Moon and Sun, and
embiacing the entire mass, s 1 — 330-
SUNDRY matters not indexed, s 1 to

end.
SUN'S Heat aids the tidal forces, s 101.

144

Sun's high temperature is in the pho*
toaphere and external strata of tha
Sun, while beneath the photosphere
theSunpossesses a. cool surface and
conditions compatible with being the
the abode of life, especially of marine
life, s 173. Sun's light and heat
mechanically produced by kinetic
movements of magnetic ponderable
masses reciprocating in 1.1 second of
time, or by a magnetic ponderable
nucleus rotating in this period, s!42
p. 43. Circulation of the solar at-
mosphere is gravitational and reiem.
bles that of the terrestrial atmos-
phere, si 06. Sun is subject to Nu-
tation, s 184. Sun's light and that
supplies the energy of the Earth'*
rotation, and so indirectly gives rrise
to the Atmospherie Circulation and
other phenomena dependent upon
the lotation, s 288, Prop. 40 & COD.

TABLE of baromeric distribution of air
pressure, pt 28.

TAHITI is the node or fulcrum of the
kinetics of the Oceanic Tidee, s 304
and con. There is no real tide at
Tahiti, but the 24 -hour change of
level of the ocean waters at Tahiti
with high water at 0 o'clock noon is
due to a diurnal displacement of the
Earth's centre of gravity of which
that change of level is the index and
marking a diurnal rotation of the
centre of gravity round the centre of
form, s 142, 283, Prop. 35, and con.
The tides should be referred to Tahiti
time, s 313 and con.

TANGKNTUL or horizontal oscillation of
the Pacitic or Polynesian Ocean is
accompanied by vertical movements
of the waters, s 264 and con. The
tangential motion of the Earth in the
orbit about the primary, the Moon or
Sun, disappears in a quarter revolu-
tion? while an equal quantity of mo'
tion is created in a rectangular direc-
tion ,and both these effects are by
gravitation of the primary orb. s 136,
context and Cor*.

THEORIES. All theories of the Tid^s
which do not recognise the eccentric-
ity of the fluids of the globe, are
worthless, s 21)9, Cor. This applies
to both the longitudinal and merid-
ional eocenricity in respect to the
semi-diurnal & diurnal tides respect-
ively.

THEORY. Radiant Theory of the Tides
s 300 and con.

THERMAL gradient, is inadequate to
produce the Atmospheric Circula-
tion. Any thermal circulation at
the base of our atmosphere can only
be directed from that part of the
Earth most distant from the Sun to
that part of the Earth where the
Sun is overhead, and this is the only
effective thermal force acting to
produce thermal convection and
wind arising therefrom. The dif-
ference of temperature at the oppo-
site ends of that diameter of the
Earth which coincides in direction
wiih the radius vector of the Sun,
the day and night ends respectively,
this is the thermal-gradient-effective
for Atmospheric Circulation. The
effect of this gradient upon Atmos-
pheric movements has never been
recognised, it can easily be calcula-
ted, and the calculation shows that
it can have no appreciable effect on
air movements. But if we regard
the difference of temperature on
Equator and the Poles as the effec-
tive thermal gradient this is about
1° Faht. in 100 miles, and on a
uniform density of air 15 Ibs to the
square inch the Atmospheric limits
would be elevated by this gradient
less than about 1 foot in 1 mile, an
elevation not sufficient to overcome
viscosity either of the air or ocean
waters, and so insufficient to produce
any Atmospheric Circulation whati
ever. Barometric gradients out-
weigh thermal gradients many
hundred times, and it is clear that
the former cannot be due to the lat«
ter,as well might we expect water to
flow uphill, and rivers run from
valleys to the top of mountains, as
expect thermal convection to produce
the Atmospheric Circulation, with
its dependant oceanic currents, s 4
— 10, con. andcors. Thermal theory
of Atmospheric Circulation must be
entirely abandoned, s 53, con.& cors.

THRACIAN north winds and the New
Moon, s 92—93.

TIDAL protuberances are quadrantal,
in longitude not hemispherical, s
247 and eon. Tidal Circle, is a
circle of high atmospheric pressure
coinciding with the lunar orbit or

14'

ecliptic circle, and these circles are
most important factors in weather
phenomena, s 24 — 35, and context.
Tidal compress aids orbital force to
produce the Atmospheric Circulation
and Oceanic Tides, s 34 and con
Tidal force is a tangential force, s
249. Tidul Circle possesses acum"
mulated air s 29, moving from east
lowest s 30, accumulating, distribu-
ting and dispersing by Earth's rota-
tion, s 31—32.
TIDES would cease to exist if the
ocean and air were spherically —
pymetrically disposed round the
globe, s 267, con. & cors. Tides
are largely due to winds
238—240 and con.. Tidal crest of
action and trough of reaction s 251
Tides by the £un are cential to
those by the Moon in Pol)nesian
waters at the time of spring tides
and neap tides, in the former case
in like phase, in the hitter differing
by half a wave period, s 312.
TRADE Winds. Their power to affec
the level of the oce.in. s 23S — 243
Cor. The Monsoons affect the leve
of the ocean, and if there is a diur
nal variation of Monsoon force, thii
would affect the diurnal tides. How
the trade winds are caused, s 3<
and con., are lost in the great low
tension system of air movement th
primary circulation of the Atmos-
phere, s 328, Fig. 24. and con
TREATISE, the principles of this
treatise, once recognised, will lead
to a proper weather science, s 123.
TROPICS of Cancer and Capricorn re-
ceive air and barometrical pressure
from the Ecliptic plane or Tidal
Circle by the action of Tidal Com.
press, Orbital Force, and the Earth's
Rotation, s 33 and con.
TWINKLING of stars is due to magnet-
isation of their light, s 142.
TYPHOONS are developed by swirls or
currents of air of more or less per-
manent type and character, s 104
and con.
UNDi'LATORY *r Radiant Theory of

the Tides, s 300 and con.
UNIVERSE, is a kinetic arrangement
in respect to matter and energy, e
227, con. and cors. Cor. The space
occupied by our universe is the
dwelling place of matter, motion,

consciousness, mind, and these are
correlated as conjoined entities.
There may be many other universes
not formed of matter, motion, con-
sciousness, mind, but of other en-
tities, and of which we can have no
cognizance, but consciousness and
mind may be regarded as links be-
tween the material and nearer
spiritual universes.

VARIOUS forces are concerned in pro-
ducing the Oceanic Tides and the
Atmospheric Circulation, but eccen-
tric and protuberant portions of the
fluids are the indirect cause of the
former, s 323 and con., and also
contribute largely to the latter,
s 314 and con.

WINDS of high tension and velocity
are due to barometrical pressure
arising from great air movements
of low tension and velocity, but
affecting vast masses of air or the
entire atmosphere, s 328 and con ,
are due chiefly to gravitational
action of the Sun, Moon, arid Earth
upon the air, s 56 and con., but in
high latitudes are largely due to
electro -magnetic deflection of air.
s 325 and con., are developed
largely as a consequence of the
eccentric distribution of the air
basins and as tidal winds, s 283,
con. and cors., are the expression of
the fosces producing the movements
of the air and other fluids those
which effect Precession, Nutation,
and the Earth's rotation, and limit
the velocity of the latter s 283 and
con. The winds of the primary
circulation are the reverse in din c-
tions to those required by a thermal
convection view, s53. con. arid cors.
and are shown by the loops.A,B,C.D,
of Fig 24, p. 132 Winds in general
8 i — 330, con. and cors.
X x grc-at developments may be ex-
pected in natural science, more
especially in meteorology, astron-
omy, and physic*, when students
arid scientist give proper attention
to this treatise, and digest and
assimilate the contents.
YEARLY variation of Tidal throw,

s 320 and con.

ZODIAC. The u light of the zodiac'
is solar light reflected from a ring
of hydrogen particles existing in space

146

around our globe. This ring: is a
belt or girdle in the equatorial re-
gions, the outer member of the Ice
Age series, i.e. of those which have
made contact with our atmosphere.
Contact of the ring with our atmos-
phere is daily developing, and soon
the ring will be engulphed and de-
scend bodily upon the globe, and
everything on the Earth's surface
will then be consumed in fne. After
this the Earth's surface will doubt-
less be created anew, for CREATION

IS THE LAW OF THE UNIVERSE,

and under God's power worlds are

born speedily without waiting end-
less ages of evolution. There have
been several Creation epochs in the
life history of this globe, and doubt-
less there will be several more. All
life appears to have been destroyed
off this globe by ice at the period
of the Ice Age, and subsequently
restored by the Adamic Creation, a
rapid process as described by Moses
in Genesis, and that in new forms
to those of former periods. For
what appears to be the second time
the ring system is again to destroy
the globe, s 142 and con.

H7

AUTOBIOGRAPHY

The Author of this Treatise was born Feb. 5th, 1851,
on the abutments of the first iron bridge that the world
ever saw, that over the Severn, built in 1779 by the
Coalbrookdale Iron Company. Only the gable of the
house of my birth is now standing, railway construction
having removed the other portion of the cottage. Soon
after my birth my parents removed to the old Baptist
Chapel house, and finally settled down at the Orchard
House, Broseley, the latter a large imposing house for a
small town, and with a magnificent orchard and garden,
and around these houses are associated my earliest mem-
ories. My first memory is that of taking a kitten to
the school of Mrs Jones who taught young children near
by the chapel house where we then lived, and I remem-
ber being pinned to Mrs Jones's apron to keep me from
running about the school. At Orchard House my mother
— whose father was a farmer — kept cows, poultry, &c.,
while my father walked every morning to the Coalbrook-
dale Ironworks, a distance of two-and-a-half miles, reach-
ing there at 6 a.m., and leaving again for home at 6 p.m.
He was a foreman dresser in the works referred to, over
a few dozen men, a position he attained when eighteen
years of age, and retained to the day of his death at
sixty-five. He was paid piece work, i.e., for what the
whole shop could produce, engaging his own men on his
terms, and after paying his men retaining the balance as
profit to himself. In his own department he was the
hardest worker and best workman that I ever met, very
ingenious and could invent tools and other things re-
quired to aid him in his work, opinions I formed when
working with him for a few months wrhen I was about
fourteen years of age. My oldest memory of the Orchard
House is that of being attacked when a boy in petticoats,
by a boar pig of great size and ferocity. Having seen
the ringing of other pigs, I thought I could ring this
monster, and unmindful of the great tusks which curved
upward from his jaw, as he grazed in the orchard, I en-
deavoured to lasso the formidable jaw with a strap. At
the third attempt to my surprise and consternation, with
a horrible roar and a most ferocious appearance which
— there could be no mistaking — indicated death for my-

lie turned round and leaped upon me, bringing me
instantly to the ground, and commenced to tear me to
pieces with his tusks. But Providence had a better des-
tiny for me, I was not to be killed and eaten by a boar,
for at a few paces distant, on an apple tree which I could
yet identify (and even the very bough from which the
swing hung if it is yet standing) my brother William, a
very small boy not three years older than myself, and
very diminutive for his age, was seated on a swing,
swaying to and fro. Hearing the roar of the beast and
seeing the attack, he leaped instantly from the swing,
looked round for help, there was the wooden prop hold-
ing up the clothes line, an old fashioned natural branch
of a tree with a V shaped end, and seizing this he ran at
the boar, brought it down on to the latter,peppering him
with all his might, and so drove the animal away, and I
was saved. Plucky fellow, when I speak to him about
it, all the credit he takes to himself is, J< Thank Provi-
dence for placing the line prop there, for without it I
could have done nothing/' I escaped with torn clothes
and one solitary scratch. Mother was very angry when
father brought the boar to the farm, and now she per-
emptory demanded that it should be removed instantly,
and no more risks taken, which was done. My next
memory is that of going to Broseley National School
taught by Mr Ledger, for whom I always entertained
the greatest respect. I was very young at this time,but
I remember being usually clad in a clean pinafore of
whife linen, as were my brothers also, and upon one oc-
casion weeping when the frost nipped my fingers on the
way home. But in one of those winters, when the old
deep pool was frozen, and nearly all the school assemb-
led round the ice after a thaw which had left it in a danger-
ous condition, amid the cheers of the spectators, I dared
more than any boy present, and went further on the ice
than any other boy, bnt alas went too far and fell through
into deep water at a considerable distance from the shore.
Ever fertile of resource, and of quick action in emer-
gency, I made for the shore by the shortest direction,
along that of the deepest water, an i seizing the ice, and
throwing my weight upon it, and breaking it into lumps,
I used the inertia of these lumps at once to keep my-
self afloat, and propel me ashore, as I pushed the lumps
of ice under me and backwards. In this way I reached
the shore safely, and after being helped out of the water,
was led away to the house of my aunt Helen, an aunt on
father's side, who dried me in front of a large fire wiih-

out taking my clothes off, and a sorry and funny spec-
tacle I presented while being dried. When nearly dry
a policeman turned up and I was sent home in his
charge. Oh, then, when my mother saw me, '.' Poor
child. Get hot water, get the bath tub," these were her
orders given quick, with many reproaches that my aunt
had not acted in this way, and soon a warm comfortable
bath and wash, and a rig out in other clothes, and I was
as right as the door nail, glorying in my adventure, but
resolving never again to venture on soft bending ice.
This escape from drowning was escape of my life No. 2.
The following winter I was again through the ice in
another pond, but thie time not in deep water. When a
little older, a vicious horse loose in the traces, ran
forward and lifted me by the neck and shook me like a
rat, and then threw me several yards from him, dead so
the horse thought, but this time the thick collar of my
winter cape saved me by receiving the bite intended for
my neck. Six months after this the same horse attacked
and killed a man in the field where it was grazing. The
last I regard as escape of my life, No. 3. Once, and when
I was about twenty years otf age my head was nearly in
the jaws of a large mastiff dog, hut instantaneous action
on my part saved me on this occasion. About the same
period I received a double legged kick from a horse in my
stomach andwas within an inch of losing my life. Amid all
these events, my life flowed happy as a marriage bell. I
loved all nature and this contributed greatly to my hap-
piness, and I had the kindest and most considerate
of parents, brothers, sisters, and friends. Speaking of
my love of nature : my first entry into the dingle, a quiet
glade near Broseley, with its red sandstone cliffs, its
wood, flowers, and stream, was like a discovery and
brought great joy to my young heart, but passing
through this same Dingle in the gloaming, produced
many and weird thoughts in my breast. Not that I knew
fear, but my wonder and curiosity was aroused. But
the happiest moment of my life was when standing on
the aforesaid iron bridge, I heard the shriek of a distant
whistle, and looking up the river, saw approaching at
full speed the steam tug, the first steam boat I had ever
seen. At this time the Severn Valley Railway was build-
in? or nearly completed. And now when it was com-
plete 1, as a b:)y of twelve years of age or so, going from
Broseley to Coalbrookclale with my father's dinner, I
heard the train approaching from tha direction of
Baildwas. Oh. how my heart leaped, for months and

years I had been ardently desiring to see a locomotive
and a train, and here it was coming, and as it swept
round the curve into the Ironbridge Station, the large
new beautiful brass-domed locomotive, I could have em-
braced it in my arms, had I been permitted to do so. I
was supremely happy. The dream of weeks and years
was realised. I had seen the locomotive. One of my
oldest memories is that of seeing the aurora borealis, or
the northern lights of which I had never heard until I
first saw them. They dawned upon me like a discovery.
Later a joy of my life was the great cornet of 1858,
through the tail of which I remember seeing a star very
distinctly. Perhaps it was this comet that directed my
attention to astronomy more than any thing else. My
Sabbath school teacher at the Broseley Congregational
Chapel was Mr Glaze, a porcelain worker at Coalport.
I was very fond of Mr Glaze, and at a very early age was
in what would be a senior class, taught by him in the
vestry. Here I puzzled him with questions about the
Sun and light, which he could not answer, and which in
later life — after I had not seen him for years — he assured
me were always present to his mind whenever he thought
of me, and which " always made him laugh/' He was
not astonished when I replied that since we last parted
when I was a boy, I had written a book on the Sun, I
refer to my treatise " The Sun a Magnet." Thirsting for
knowledge, as a youth in the ironworks, in the workshop
of my father, I questioned my uncle Geone, my father's
brother who worked for father, a nice patient docile man,
but the only response I could get was " Dan no bother
me John, go and count the stars." The engineer of the
works had constantly to drive me from his engines.
Week in and week out I was never tired of looking at
and studying the latter, but he was inexorable and only
by stealth could I get an opportunity to do so. When I
met him years afterwards he remembered these incidents.
When living- at Broseley, the distant furnaces "Blessed —
hill furnaces" reminded me of anything but Blessed-hill.
I thought of hell, where the fires never go out, for every
night those fires lit up the sky with a lurid Hint, and
I was assured that they were also always burning by
night and day. But the mystery of these furnaces ap-
peared to be too deej) for my investigation, although in
connection with them my curiosity was greatly aroused.
When I was a very little boy, too young to associate
with my bi* brothers, they played truant from school,
and went from Broseley to Much Wenlock Olympic games.

I'l

But " little John" also nicknamed " fatty" (with his
round face) was not to be done, and all alone I tramped
from Broseley to Wenlock, a distance of four miles, the
longest distance I had ever been from home. How they
stared and all their companions when amid the glory of
the games, " little John" presented himself on the course,
and I venture to say that no person in that field on that
afternoon enjoyed him or herself better than I did. Eut
a bad time was in store for me, for on the way home at
night E — S — 'now in his grave) played a trick on me
which nearly finished my course. Asking me to keep in
his pipe as he had no more matches, he plied it again and
again until "little John" collapsed, and was as near
kingdom come as ever he was in his life, not excepting
the interview with the boar. But again u little John"
pulled through, for after lying down to die by the side of
the road, he recovered sufficiently to be carried, brother
Tom at one shoulder, brother William at the other, E. S.
at ihe one leg, J.H. at the other, thus away the group set
out in the dark over the few miles of fields and roads in-
tervening between our position and home, but before at-
taining the latter I was able to walk unassisted, and on
reaching home, to slip up to bed unperceived. I learned
a grand lesson that night. Ever logical, I reasoned that
the thing which could take me so near death's door could
not be good, oni from that day to this, I have never
smoked tobacco. E. S., poor lad, in comparatively early
life, leaping from a vehicle, received injuries from which
he never fully recovered, and for many jears he has been
in his grave. He was a nice fellow, very good looking, of
splendid physique, and his mother a nice woman whom I
knew well, must have loved the Sun, for. when I was
quite a boy I remember hearing thut she had been blind
for three days with looking at that orb. Often when I
have been tempted to gaze at the Sun with my naked
eyes, remembering this story of Mrs S., I have acted
cautiously. Necessarily I have had to take some risks to
my sight in dealing with the question of what is the Sun?
At a very early age, when a mere youth, it was a pre-
sentiment in my mind that that question involved my
life's work, and chat I was born to successfully deal with
it, and to tell the world what the Sun is. Love of nature
was the strongest passion of my youth next to love of
God, but God always seemed to me to be omnipresent in
nature. My love of nature was as it were my love of
nature's God. I loved nature best in her wildest moods,
and when the whirlwind was shaking the apple trees
and pear trees of the old orchard at Orchard House, of

152

which there was a superb variety sufficient to satisfy an
epicure or fruit connoisseur of the most refined tastes,
amid the roaring of the thunder, the showers, and the
flashes of lightning, ''little John" would dash out of the
hayloft or barn in among the trees and snatch up the
golden fruit as it lay on the ground for the picking up,
and bear it into the shelter, and share it with my com-
panions. Those were happy times varied by fisticuffs
with wisps of hay tied round our hands for gloves, when
we would box in the hayloft hour after honr, practising
as we said the noble art of self-defence, which was an
art very much needed among the young at Broseley. As
a boy I have been in many a fight and usually came off
victorious, but never struck the first blow. My darling
mother whose soul is now with Jesus, would never
allow her children to strike the first blow, and
was averse to quarreling, but a woman of undaunted
courage and spirits herself, one who could never endure
to be sat upon, it was sufficient apology for our fights if
we could say that our opponent had struck us first.
Honestly speaking, I rather liked the excitement of a
pugilistic encounter in which 1 was one of the principals,
but never had any taste for seeing others fight. A
phrenologist has assured me that I have the bump of
combativeness in an extraordinary degree, and would
resist an injustice almost to the death, at the same time
he said, that to look at me, any ordinary person
would suppose me to be, the mildest of the mild.
I have no hesitation in saying that this phrenolo-
gist was right, as the same gentleman (almost an en-
tire stranger to me) was upon every point. But of this
later on. Let me say here, that my brother William, the
hero of the boar incident, the smallest in stature of my
six brothers, was the pluckiest arid most indomitable
youth I ever knew. He never was beaten, and on one
occasion fought a pitched battle in a ring in a field before
the whole school of Mr Truelove, by whom he was edu-
cated, fought successively two brothers Richard and
Henry Instone, both of whom were taller and heavier
than William, excellent built, well-fed youths of strength
and energy, and one of which, if not both were older in
years than William. In later years William achieved
considerable distinction in amateur athletics, and is
now a town councillor in Longton, Staffordshire. In
consequence of the boar incident I have always almost
worshipped William, and he has only to command me of
anything reasonable that lies in my power in order to
obtain it. As a family of seven brothers and seven

153

sisters, a perfect and complete number of each, of the
ten who survived to years of maturity, we were all af-
fectionate towards each other and never had a quarrel
or grulga one as^insfc t!i3 other, b'it pugnacious, though
noble minded William,was tacitly acknowledged by us all,
cock of the group. Father was a man of deep affec-
tions, and great piety and love of God at heart, with an
ever present "God bless you" for his children, which
were also words of my mother, words ever on the lips of
both father and mother, and mother loved her children,
almost to distraction, especially when peril threatened
any, or any one had been in peril and it came to her
knowledge, and I have seen her in her concern for the
spiritual destiny and well being of one of her children,
pull the hair out of her head. On behalf of her boys she
preferred death to dishonour or departure from holiness.
To my mother's superior endowments, deep insights and
perceptions, and the faculties associated \vith her high
strungnervous nature and quick blue-grey eyes, (which by
the way were similar in colour to father's and my own),
and her love of discussion and investigation, and her
splendid conversational powers, and her great faith in
Providence as an - ever present God presiding over our
destinies, and to her belief in her children in general,
and in " little John" in particular, and to her splendid
imagination and perception, gifted largely to myself by
heritage, to her I owe largely what by the grace of God
I am. To my father I owe physical strength and energy
greater than my light weight (9 stone 10 Ibs) would sug-
gest, but also constructive and inventive powers. As-
signing imagination, perception, and judgment to my
mother, and imagination and constructive invention to
my father, to these gifts more than to any other, inher-
ited from them, I owe any powers I possess of dealing
with natural science, and its difficult problems. The
marriage of my parents was a very romantic one. There
cannot be a doubt but this marriage was made in heaven,
at the same time also, that my father was the genius of
the movement, and effected the marriage in a manner
such as to show that as a young man, he was endowed
with verv considerable diplomacy and resource, and I
think that his choice showed a good judgment also, and
the manner in which he effected their runaway marriage,
a very just estimate at once of the vanity of women and
of cause and effect. I have reason to believe that at the
time of my parents marriage, my mother who belonged
to a physique that ripened very late in life, though
twenty years of age, was scarcely a mature woman, and

154

possessed little or no desire to marry in general, nor any
desire to marry mv father in particular, though she did
not altogether repel his advances, and at least felt flat-
tered by his attentions. Mother was trifling, father
meant business. He had first met her at her brothers,
at the Crown and Anchor Hotel, of which the latter was
proprietor at Broseley, and at once recognised that be-
sides being likely to be an heiress to her grandma,
Sarah Palin, of Kinnersley (who possessed considerable
wealth in her own right and which only referred to a por-
tion of an estate in which she was thrown to the thirds),
she was a most prepossessing young lady. Tall, slender,
genteel, polished, kindness itself in heart, with hair al-
most lint white,of excellent constitution and parts even to
her teeth now so rarely perfect in many people, father
having set his heart upon her, could not be denied
such a treasure if it could be possessed at all on his part.
But she was obdurate, she refused to marry, she pleaded
that she was too young to marry, and besides that she
had 110 intention to wed my father. How then were her
fine perceptions and imagination to be united with his
strength of manhood and mechanical and constructive
skill, and bye the by*, father played the flute in the con-
gregational choir of Broseley,and taught a Sabbath school
class there. He also sang in the choir, with a somewhat
nice voice which he used to speak of as falsetto. I men-
tion the flute, as he was passionately fond of music, his
favourite hymn being the one on death, "Lend, lend your
wings, I mount I fly," and I remember that his favourite
psalm was the 104th psalm that treating most largely of
nature. He was passionately fond of nature, the fields,
the woods, the rivers, the seas, and landscapes generally,
and delighted to contemplate these. I am aware that
these are qualities which many persons possess, perhaps
most persons, but father possessed them in an unusual
degree. In his personal tastes, he liked to shine in his
own circle of friends, he even liked to be flattered, but
any kindness shown to him would melt him almost to
tears. Gratitude and love were special features of father,
and he was of what I might call, the emotional tempera-
ment. Mother's delights were rather in the spiritual
world, and in seeking the welfare and salvation of her
fellow creatures. Her heart was with Jesus and in heaven,
though her choice of a house from time to time as a place
of residence on earth, showed that natural beauty of sit-
uation and environment weighed with her to some ex-
tent. In her prayers, in which she always took great

ifrs

delight, her mind used to reach down the ages and in a
way so as to comprehend every person related to her in
near kinship or blood both alive and yet to be born, more
especially to her own children and grandchildren right
down to the latest generations. Her spiritual vision
seemed to grasp the present generations and all to come,
and she had a marvellous power of prayer embracing all,
with a faith in Jesus whom she always called " Dear
Lord" which never for a moment wavered, though she
used frequently to assert that as a young woman she had
been very vain, proud,and haughty, until her heart was
changed in conversion. But for these assertions due al-
lowance must be made, I never heard any other person
say such things of her,but as a young woman that she had
a touch of pride and vanity is probable, and what young
lady from sweet seventeen to marriage has not. The
qualities of her youth which she condemned, were doubt-
less, strong personality, individuality, and imperious-
ness arising from the conscious possession of gifts often
denied to others, and considerable pride arising from this
consciousness. Her qualities were those which in the
animal world I would assign to the lion and lioness,
which are perhaps the most proud members of the
animal kingdom, and shall we say, justly so. But after
conversion, she appeared to lose herself entirely in God's
will, her natural gifts becoming sanctified to spiritual
uses, the one object in her life, being the salvation of her
husband, family, and neighbours. Of her own salvation
she was absolutely sure, and this appeared to cost her
scarcely a thought, but her anxiety for her husband,
children, and friends, has sometimes greatly agitated
her, even to tears. Brought up an Episcopalian, the
strictest of the strict, living at the very church door at
Sherifhales; after her marriage she was induced to, or did
of her own free will, attend the Congregational Church,
Broseley. But she had not been a member there for
long, and following her conversion, before she was led to
believe that she ought to be baptized by immersion and
join the Baptists. (By the way, my great grandfather
William Jones, also of Orchard House, Broseley, appears
to have been a Baptist, for his grave, marked by a stone
and an inscription is to be seen in the Birch Meadow
Baptist Chapel, Broseley, and also my grandfather Richard
Jones — whom I remember well, was a strong built
man like his sons, and was cooper to Lord Forester and
other gentry — also my grandmother Mrs Richard Jones
— whom I remember well as a tall well built woman)*

156

Mother announced to her Congregational minister,
who loth to lose my parents as members, gave her
a book to read written by a Wesleyan minister, to
prove that infant baptism was right. This she read,
and on the Congregational minister asking what she
thought of baptism after reading the book, she replied,
" I thought it my duty to God to be baptized before, but
now I am quite convinced that it is so, and that believers'
baptism and that by immersion only, is the only true and
scriptural baptism/' and the upshot was, that acting on
this belief, my mother, father, a Mr Boden, Mr Legg,
and another person, were all five baptized together,
by the Rev. Mr Yale, at the old Baptist Chapel,
Broseley, when Mr Yale composed a poem or a hymn for
the occasion. It was a red letter day in the lives of all
five, and all had a great gift of prayer bestowed upon
them, as if the Holy Ghost had descended in power upon
them, but more especially upon Mr William Boden and
my mother. In prayer Mr Boden appeared to bring the
heavens down, but sometimes after partaking of wine at
the communion, or of beer at the house of some unin-
structed, and on this point ignorant Christian friend, an
old taste was roused, which brought him nearly down to
hell and the grave, but despite all this, I never had a
doubt but that he was a true child of God, and doubt not
but that he is now in the kingdom of heaven waving
palms of victory over sin, and never to fall any more.
Alas that the church should diet its children with alco-
hol. " If a man ask bread will ye give him a serpent."
It is a greater crime on the part of ministers of the gos-
pel and professing Christians to put the intoxicating cup
upon the Lord's table and upon their own tables than to
keep a common drink shop and sell intoxicating drinks.
But to return to my father's marriage. He wanted
Miss Maria Palin, my future mother, to choose a silk for
a wedding dress, and brought her patterns from a neigh-
bouring; mercer, in suitable colours, but she declined to
choose, saying she was much too young to marry and had
no thoughts of marriage as yet. On this he said, " Tell
me which you like best," to which she replied, " Well if I
was choosing,that is the one I would like," indicating one
of the colours. Upon this he purchased sufficient of the
silk to make a dress, and handed it to a local dressmaker
with instructions to make it in suitable style for his in-
tended. How the dressmaker obtained the size I was
never informed, but the dress was made and delivered to
the prospective bride. My father then invited Miss Palin

157

to accompany him from Broseley to Wolverhampton races.
They drove in a vehicle to Wellington, the nearest rail-
way station on the route, calling at a draper's shop in
Ironbridge on the way, where father purchased every-
thing that was needed to complete the bridal outfit. Up
tijl this time little did Miss Palin suspect that she was
being dressed for her marriage. But arrived at Wolver-
hampton (and they say fortune favours the bold) father
proposed that before going to the races they should get
married. He obtained her consent and they were mar-
ried by special license, returning home to their own
house that evening, which latter father previously had
the forethought to provide. There was not a great deal
of furniture in the house, but there was sufficient for two,
and father was in a position to speedily add whatever else
was needed. In due time the first John of the family
was born, a beautiful boy, a born naturalist, seeking liv-
ing specimens and crowing over them in the garden be-
fore he was two years of age, but declared by the grand-
mother on our father's side to be too beautiful and good
for this world — though his young mother little heeded
the warning. When about two years of age in full health
and twenty-four hours before the child died, the grand-
father on mother's side had a presentiment of coming
death to the child, and warned both my parents. The
blow fell, seized with croup, which frequently threatened
the first members of our family, the child died after a
few short hours of illness. Then my father rolled dis-
tracted and weeping on the floor, but mother held up
bravely to comfort him, " Tuts man, we shall have some
more,'1 she said. " No, no," said father, refusing to be
comforted, u we shall not have any more." They lived
to have five more boys, and seven girls, and to name
another boy John, the fifth of the family, viz. your
humble servant the writer. The first five of the family
were boys, all with white or flaxen hair except your
humble servant, who though not daik, but possessing
mid-brown hair, was the darkest of the family, including
all the girls. We were all so like one another in individu-
ality or expression, that those who knew one of the
family knew all wherever they met them. Father and
brother Arthur travelling to Scotland, coming to Dundee
to see me, were at once recognised at Perth by a neigh-
bour of mine as being my father and brother, immediate-
ly they at Perth entered the Dundee train, though it was
an entirely unexpected interview, and this neighbour
who lived next door to myself brought them straight to

the house. An expression or roll of the eye, dependent
on the cable anchorage in the orbit, and a certain shape
of the temples, appears to have been common to every
member of the family, otherwise there were considerable
differences of feature, while doubtless also there was
something common in the voice. All my brothers and
sisters were clever at school, (Richard perhaps the most
clever) unless my brother Thomas be excepted, and he
had only average abilities but possessed the finest phys-
ique of the f amily, and was always a great favourite with
his father, who was very proud of such a strapping boy.
But Richard was the cleverest after the first John, and
struck every one he met as a born gentleman. As he
grew his hair did not darken much, and as a man he had
beautiful flaxen hair. My sister Emma was and still is
a marvellous player on the piano. Born in the same
valley as the renowned Watkiss, her teachers declared
that they had never met such a player, certainly her
playing pleased me better than any other player I have
ever heard ; she has taught the piano, and taken first
prize on the piano at an open competition musical bee
at Broseley. But enough of family details, and to return
to myself. I have a memory of almost every kindness
done to myself when young. Especially do I remember
the kindness of some lady friends of my mother and
their lessons and counsels to me. I think I was a great
favourite with my mother's sister, my aunt Davies, now
no more. I remember my mother's sister, my aunt Pitt,
a very beautiful woman, who died of decline, probably
the dregs of typhus fever contracted when young. On
one occasion when I was a very little boy I had been
taking her water cresses, of which she was very fond,
and to which she assigned medical virtues, and she had
given me a shilling. I felt that this was too much, had
she given me a penny I would have kept it, but she
would have no refusal but forced me to take it. Passing
her cottage window I perceived that one of the panes of
glass was broken, and I dropped the shilling through the
hole of the broken pane back into the house,and sought
to escape round the corner. But she heard the coin fall,
and instantly rushed to the door greatly agitated, and
to allay her feelings, much against my will, I had to ac-
cept the gift. I remember her beautiful face, made more
beautiful by the nature of her illness,but the above is the
last incident of her life that I remember. I have a dim
memory of my aunt Wood and her daughters, but no
memory of any other of my mother's brothers

159

and sisters. Typhus impaired the constitutions of most
of my mother's brothers and sisters when young,and led
to comparatively early death, but mother was one of the
family that escaped untouched by that disease, and so
lived to a good age. Though my mother was of a genteel
light slender form, rather tall as women go, and of men-
tal nervous temperament like myself, in many of her
characteristics resembling a blood race-horse , she was
very wiry and healthy, and retained the full possession
of all her mental faculties up to the day of her death at
76, a good report of the health of one who had borne
fourteen children, and at death she had a terrible
struggle with pain before finally passing away in peace.
She was strong in" death, and of her life " I do like that
woman" were the words of those who knew my mother
best and who came in contact with her large hearted
and spiritual mind, and found that she was ever ready
to counsel and advise, a bright and shining example, and
ever concerned for the spiritual salvation of every one
whom she met. Her realisation of good desires and a
divine life appeared to be more perfect than what is
common to the lot of most Christians. She may have
made mistakes and committed errors of judgment, but I
never knew her to sin wilfully, or to do a selfish act
which wronged or injured another, but it must also be
owned, that she had little patience for wrong doing in
any form by others, and could not understand why
every person should not be virtuous. And so on this
account perhaps she was often misunderstood by her
neighbours or i.e. made few friends beyond her imme-
diate circle, but she certainly never made a single enemy.
At 14 years of age " little John" followed his brother
drapers Richard and William, and went from his home,
(now at Coalbrookdale),to Liverpool, and became appren-
tice to Wm. Morgan & Co.. a very large firm of drapers,
in Scotland Road of that city. Here I was not happy.
The apprentices boarded in, as did all the counter hands,
with few domestic comforts, and this contrasted cruelly
with the happy home I had left, and the city itself was a
brick wilderness when compared with the sylvan beau-
ties of Coalbrookdale, and the green fields, woods, mea-
dows, and other scenery of the Severn valley in the
beautiful borderland of Shropshire. It was like going
from heaven to hell, and often did I wish to break the
bonds which confined me to the city. But under a sense
of duty I held on, and only once asked to be released.
There were eighteen apprentices in all, and of these four-
teen took to drinking, in several cases associated with

160

other wild ways, and several died premature deaths soon
after finishing their apprenticeship. But your humble
servant the writer kept his garments comparatively un-
tarnished. I escaped "by the skin of my teeth," but
never would I knowingly put a son of mine or any other
person under similar peril. Perhaps my escape was
largely due to my love of reading. In my youth I read
everything that came in my way. No reading seemed
to come amiss, and thus I was storing up a considerable
general knowledge, and acquiring the power to observe
and to think. There was a free library near hand to Mor-
gan's, and I availed myself of the same, rny favourite
literature being the English Mechanic, a periodical large-
ly devoted to science. There were discussions and articles
in that paper which helped to develope in me the faculty
of logic and of thinking. Be that as it may between the
years of 14 and 21 I conceived an ardent love for natural
science which has never left me, and in subsequent
years I have attended classes at the Y. M. C.A. rooms,
Dundee, and at University College, Dundee, and done
some experimental and laboratory work at the latter.
At 23 years of age I was offering my theory of theSun,its
central magnetism and mechanics, to the Royal Society,
Edinburgh, through the medium of Professor Tait, but
at that time it was comparatively crude. This of course
was previous to the observations made at Dundee on
Oct. 19th, 1879, when the period of the central move-
ment in the Sun was revealed to me. Later the 3t in.
achromatic refractor I obtained from Lancaster of Birmin-
gham to view th« Sun, made known to me the coralline and
calcium character of the lunar structure and face, this
discovery being briefly described in my little book,
" New Selenography." This was an instantaneous, sud-
den, and altogether unexpected discovery, because I had
quite thought that we knew all about so near a neigh-
bour as the Moon, and having only a special and great
interest in origins, for long I forbore even to turn my
telescope on that orb.

In recent years I had occasion to give an essay before
the Literary Society of Ogilvie Free Church, to show
how the Sun's heat produced the Atmospheric Circula-
tion by thermal convection, only to discover when pre-
paring the essay that the facts did not agree with the
thermal convection theory, but that the winds and cur-
rents of air were in general going the wrong way over
the surface of the Earth consistently with thermal views,
and eventually I was led to discard thermal convection

entirely in this connection, and to make the discoveries
and embrace the views of the Atmospheric Circulation
given in this treatise. Then with regard to my discov-
eries and views anent Gravitation, the Oceanic Tides,
Precession, Nutation, Secular Retardation, the Earth's
Rotation, and other results as given in the treatise, their
development is largely manifested therein, and on
these I need not here dwell, but commit the whole to the
judgment of my readers and to posterity. Married at
Dundee to Isabella Buchan Baird, a Dundee lady, on
July 18th, 1876, the union has been a fruitful one. Blessed
with seven boys and three girls, we have only lost one, a
little girl taken away the day after Christmas eve, 1882,
at a time of the absence of myself from home. Every in-
cident of that period is fresh in my memory, even to the
chirp of the robin that in my loneliness and darkness
came under my window. Sweet bird ! it brought hope to
my breast in a dark hour. Valuing reason more than
life, I could neither submit to have it taken away, nor
could I submit to the declaration that I had at any time
lost it, and in the Providence of God, I think I have been
fully vindicated, my words, on the occasion of the incid-
ent referred to, being, "we shall be vindicated," but for
a moment I distrusted Providence, or invoked Providence,
I don't know which, and became desperate, with nearly
disastrous results, but results eventually successful, and
" all is well that ends well," and I have been spared to do
the work of this treatise and complete its pages. Recently
my eldest son George William has taken his M.A. degree
with honours at Edinburgh University, and is a medallist
there several times over, the other members of the family
are all very much what I could wish them to be, and I hope
it will not provoke any person to jealousy, but most of
them have been said to be clever at school. John, the
second eldest, assists me in my business, David, a very
promising boy, is at the High School, Dundee,butis com-
ing of an age to look out for employment. I need not say
anything special of the others, but the least intellectual
of the group is a good average, while in physique,like my-
self, they all enjoy the best of health. The doctor has
been almost a stranger at our house, except on
those special occasions when there was to be an addition
to our number. But we must not boast, for " we know
not what a day or an hour may bring forth."

To the admirers of the poet Burns, I may say that a
kind fate or otherwise, has sent me two original oil por-
traits of the poet, the one by Henry Raeburn, and the

162

other by Alexander Reid, and I take this opportunity of
asking an interest in these portraits as well as in the
work of this treatise. The former of the two portraits
ought to be in the National Gallery at London or Edin-
burgh, but I cannot afford to present them, but for a
consideration might be induced to part with them, wbich
consideration shall be moderate if assured that the for-
mer of the two portraits shall be gifted or sold to either
of those institutions. Those persons who shall possess
a copy of this treatise, if they desire, may have the
privilege of viewing the portraits here referred to.
Should any publisher be desirous of publishing a life of
Burns, or life and poems, the portraits would be useful
for embellishing and promoting the sale of the work.

The poet Burns is said to be the only poet who ever
signed himself "Poet," and posterity has confirmed his
judgment upon that point. In signing myself " Natural
Philosopher," see p. 43, will posterity confirm my judg-
ment. I have not written sweet songs like the poet,
but I have loved nature as ardently as he loved poetry
and the lasses, and "Nature never did deceive the
heart of him who truly loved her."

Sunbrae, Bingham Terrace,

Dundee, June 9th, 1903.

OF THE

UNIVERSITY

OF

'FORM't

E. BOWI8, PBINTEB, TAT TEBRACS, DUftDBX.

163

f

4

Fig. 1

Fig. 6.

165

166

V4'

£?r*j^^

«* *^y>iX^^^^ x, J • \>

Fig. 21.

Fig. 17.

167

•to

Kg. 18.

Fig. 19.

Fig, 20.

OK THE

ff UNIVERSITY

ROBERT BURNS, SCOTLAND'S GREATEST POET.

From an original portrait by HENRY RAEBURN, Scotland's greatest portrait painter. Painted
Edinburgh in the 29th year of Burns' age. The original portrait is in the possession of the Autl
of this " Treatise." This portrait, now published for the first time, A.D. 1903, is the copyright
the Author. It shows Burns at his best, and before the Edinburgh coach accident had marred 1
visage. It is a beautiful face with almost superhuman eyes. The hair is lank over the forehes
the style in which Burns usually wore his hair. This is the " Henry " portrait of Burns referred
in Letter xxxix., Clarinda to Sylvander, under date February 7th, 1788, the day following
exchange of portraits between Burns and Clarinda. The ultimate destiny of the portrait, as a
that of the REID portrait, appears to have been that it passed into the possession of Elizabeth Pat
or Elizabeth Paton Burns, with whom Burns appears to have retained a life-long friendship, and
whom he appears to have sung as his "fair Eliza."

JOHN JONES, AT AGE 35.

The discoverer of the only two original portraits of Burns which agree perfectly in their
likeness (that by RAEBURN and that by ALEXANDER REID), and therefore must take
the first place among the portraits of that illustrious poet ; and the Author of this
Treatise, "A Kinetic Universe," embracing the "Gravitational or Perturbation
Theory of the Atmospheric Circulation," " Subordination of the Precession of the
Equinoxes and Nutations of the Earth to the Movements of the Atmosphere, Ocean,
and Fluids of the Globe," and a " Gyrational and Kinelic Theory of Gravitation,"
&c., &c., &c. See Index of Treatise. J. JONES regards the above as his best
portrait, and a portrait at his best. Born on the abutments of the Iron Bridge at
Benthall, Broseley, Salop, February 5th, 1851.

< z

C- K

"a II

UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY

THIS BOOK IS DUE ON THE LAST DATE
STAMPED BELOW

5161 6 loo

ocr a I9J5

30m-l,'15